* libfuncs.h (LTI_extendsfdf2, LTI_extendsfxf2, LTI_extendsftf2)

[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / config / sparc / sparc.c

/* Subroutines for insn-output.c for SPARC.
   Copyright (C) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
   1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   Contributed by Michael Tiemann (tiemann@cygnus.com)
   64-bit SPARC-V9 support by Michael Tiemann, Jim Wilson, and Doug Evans,
   at Cygnus Support.

This file is part of GCC.

GCC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
any later version.

GCC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
along with GCC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.  */

#include "config.h"
#include "system.h"
#include "coretypes.h"
#include "tm.h"
#include "tree.h"
#include "rtl.h"
#include "regs.h"
#include "hard-reg-set.h"
#include "real.h"
#include "insn-config.h"
#include "conditions.h"
#include "output.h"
#include "insn-attr.h"
#include "flags.h"
#include "function.h"
#include "expr.h"
#include "optabs.h"
#include "recog.h"
#include "toplev.h"
#include "ggc.h"
#include "tm_p.h"
#include "debug.h"
#include "target.h"
#include "target-def.h"
#include "cfglayout.h"

/* 1 if the caller has placed an "unimp" insn immediately after the call.
   This is used in v8 code when calling a function that returns a structure.
   v9 doesn't have this.  Be careful to have this test be the same as that
   used on the call.  */

#define SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P  \
(!TARGET_ARCH64 && current_function_returns_struct			\
 && ! integer_zerop (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl)))	\
 && (TREE_CODE (DECL_SIZE (DECL_RESULT (current_function_decl)))	\
     == INTEGER_CST))

/* Global variables for machine-dependent things.  */

/* Size of frame.  Need to know this to emit return insns from leaf procedures.
   ACTUAL_FSIZE is set by compute_frame_size() which is called during the
   reload pass.  This is important as the value is later used in insn
   scheduling (to see what can go in a delay slot).
   APPARENT_FSIZE is the size of the stack less the register save area and less
   the outgoing argument area.  It is used when saving call preserved regs.  */
static int apparent_fsize;
static int actual_fsize;

/* Number of live general or floating point registers needed to be
   saved (as 4-byte quantities).  */
static int num_gfregs;

/* Save the operands last given to a compare for use when we
   generate a scc or bcc insn.  */
rtx sparc_compare_op0, sparc_compare_op1;

/* Coordinate with the md file wrt special insns created by
   sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue.  */
bool sparc_emitting_epilogue;

/* Vector to say how input registers are mapped to output registers.
   HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM cannot be remapped by this function to
   eliminate it.  You must use -fomit-frame-pointer to get that.  */
char leaf_reg_remap[] =
{ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
  -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, 14, -1,
  -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1, -1,
  8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, -1, 15,

  32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
  40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47,
  48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55,
  56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63,
  64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71,
  72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79,
  80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87,
  88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95,
  96, 97, 98, 99, 100};

/* Vector, indexed by hard register number, which contains 1
   for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
   function treatment.  */
char sparc_leaf_regs[] =
{ 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0,
  0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1,
  1, 1, 1, 1, 1};

struct machine_function GTY(())
{
  /* Some local-dynamic TLS symbol name.  */
  const char *some_ld_name;
};

/* Name of where we pretend to think the frame pointer points.
   Normally, this is "%fp", but if we are in a leaf procedure,
   this is "%sp+something".  We record "something" separately as it may be
   too big for reg+constant addressing.  */

static const char *frame_base_name;
static int frame_base_offset;

static void sparc_init_modes (void);
static int save_regs (FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int, int);
static int restore_regs (FILE *, int, int, const char *, int, int);
static void build_big_number (FILE *, int, const char *);
static int function_arg_slotno (const CUMULATIVE_ARGS *, enum machine_mode,
				tree, int, int, int *, int *);

static int supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);
static int hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);

static void sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx);
static void sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx);
static void sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void);
static int check_return_regs (rtx);
static int epilogue_renumber (rtx *, int);
static bool sparc_assemble_integer (rtx, unsigned int, int);
static int set_extends (rtx);
static void output_restore_regs (FILE *, int);
static void sparc_output_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static void sparc_output_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static void sparc_flat_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static void sparc_flat_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static void sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
static void sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (FILE *, HOST_WIDE_INT, int);
#ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
static void sparc_elf_asm_named_section (const char *, unsigned int);
#endif
static void sparc_aout_select_section (tree, int, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
     ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;
static void sparc_aout_select_rtx_section (enum machine_mode, rtx,
					   unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT)
     ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED;

static int sparc_adjust_cost (rtx, rtx, rtx, int);
static int sparc_issue_rate (void);
static void sparc_sched_init (FILE *, int, int);
static int sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface (void);
static int sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void);

static void emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *, int, rtx *);
static void emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
static void emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
static void emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code, rtx *);
static void emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code, rtx *);

static bool sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree, tree);
static void sparc_init_libfuncs (void);
static void sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *, tree, HOST_WIDE_INT,
				   HOST_WIDE_INT, tree);
static struct machine_function * sparc_init_machine_status (void);
static bool sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx);
static rtx sparc_tls_get_addr (void);
static rtx sparc_tls_got (void);
static const char *get_some_local_dynamic_name (void);
static int get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *, void *);
static bool sparc_rtx_costs (rtx, int, int, int *);
\f
/* Option handling.  */

/* Code model option as passed by user.  */
const char *sparc_cmodel_string;
/* Parsed value.  */
enum cmodel sparc_cmodel;

char sparc_hard_reg_printed[8];

struct sparc_cpu_select sparc_select[] =
{
  /* switch	name,		tune	arch */
  { (char *)0,	"default",	1,	1 },
  { (char *)0,	"-mcpu=",	1,	1 },
  { (char *)0,	"-mtune=",	1,	0 },
  { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
};

/* CPU type.  This is set from TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT and -m{cpu,tune}=xxx.  */
enum processor_type sparc_cpu;
\f
/* Initialize the GCC target structure.  */

/* The sparc default is to use .half rather than .short for aligned
   HI objects.  Use .word instead of .long on non-ELF systems.  */
#undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP
#define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.half\t"
#ifndef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
#undef TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP
#define TARGET_ASM_ALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.word\t"
#endif

#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP
#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_HI_OP "\t.uahalf\t"
#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP
#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_SI_OP "\t.uaword\t"
#undef TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP
#define TARGET_ASM_UNALIGNED_DI_OP "\t.uaxword\t"

/* The target hook has to handle DI-mode values.  */
#undef TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
#define TARGET_ASM_INTEGER sparc_assemble_integer

#undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
#define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE sparc_output_function_prologue
#undef TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
#define TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE sparc_output_function_epilogue

#undef TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
#define TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST sparc_adjust_cost
#undef TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
#define TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE sparc_issue_rate
#undef TARGET_SCHED_INIT
#define TARGET_SCHED_INIT sparc_sched_init
#undef TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE
#define TARGET_SCHED_USE_DFA_PIPELINE_INTERFACE sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface
#undef TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
#define TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD sparc_use_sched_lookahead

#undef TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
#define TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall

#undef TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
#define TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS sparc_init_libfuncs

#ifdef HAVE_AS_TLS
#undef TARGET_HAVE_TLS
#define TARGET_HAVE_TLS true
#endif
#undef TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
#define TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM sparc_cannot_force_const_mem

#undef TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
#define TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK sparc_output_mi_thunk
#undef TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
#define TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK default_can_output_mi_thunk_no_vcall

#undef TARGET_RTX_COSTS
#define TARGET_RTX_COSTS sparc_rtx_costs
#undef TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
#define TARGET_ADDRESS_COST hook_int_rtx_0

struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
\f
/* Validate and override various options, and do some machine dependent
   initialization.  */

void
sparc_override_options (void)
{
  static struct code_model {
    const char *const name;
    const int value;
  } const cmodels[] = {
    { "32", CM_32 },
    { "medlow", CM_MEDLOW },
    { "medmid", CM_MEDMID },
    { "medany", CM_MEDANY },
    { "embmedany", CM_EMBMEDANY },
    { 0, 0 }
  };
  const struct code_model *cmodel;
  /* Map TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT to value for -m{arch,tune}=.  */
  static struct cpu_default {
    const int cpu;
    const char *const name;
  } const cpu_default[] = {
    /* There must be one entry here for each TARGET_CPU value.  */
    { TARGET_CPU_sparc, "cypress" },
    { TARGET_CPU_sparclet, "tsc701" },
    { TARGET_CPU_sparclite, "f930" },
    { TARGET_CPU_v8, "v8" },
    { TARGET_CPU_hypersparc, "hypersparc" },
    { TARGET_CPU_sparclite86x, "sparclite86x" },
    { TARGET_CPU_supersparc, "supersparc" },
    { TARGET_CPU_v9, "v9" },
    { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc, "ultrasparc" },
    { TARGET_CPU_ultrasparc3, "ultrasparc3" },
    { 0, 0 }
  };
  const struct cpu_default *def;
  /* Table of values for -m{cpu,tune}=.  */
  static struct cpu_table {
    const char *const name;
    const enum processor_type processor;
    const int disable;
    const int enable;
  } const cpu_table[] = {
    { "v7",         PROCESSOR_V7, MASK_ISA, 0 },
    { "cypress",    PROCESSOR_CYPRESS, MASK_ISA, 0 },
    { "v8",         PROCESSOR_V8, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
    /* TI TMS390Z55 supersparc */
    { "supersparc", PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8 },
    { "sparclite",  PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE },
    /* The Fujitsu MB86930 is the original sparclite chip, with no fpu.
       The Fujitsu MB86934 is the recent sparclite chip, with an fpu.  */
    { "f930",       PROCESSOR_F930, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU, MASK_SPARCLITE },
    { "f934",       PROCESSOR_F934, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLITE|MASK_FPU },
    { "hypersparc", PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V8|MASK_FPU },
    { "sparclite86x",  PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X, MASK_ISA|MASK_FPU,
      MASK_SPARCLITE },
    { "sparclet",   PROCESSOR_SPARCLET, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
    /* TEMIC sparclet */
    { "tsc701",     PROCESSOR_TSC701, MASK_ISA, MASK_SPARCLET },
    { "v9",         PROCESSOR_V9, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9 },
    /* TI ultrasparc I, II, IIi */
    { "ultrasparc", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9
    /* Although insns using %y are deprecated, it is a clear win on current
       ultrasparcs.  */
    						    |MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
    /* TI ultrasparc III */
    /* ??? Check if %y issue still holds true in ultra3.  */
    { "ultrasparc3", PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3, MASK_ISA, MASK_V9|MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS},
    { 0, 0, 0, 0 }
  };
  const struct cpu_table *cpu;
  const struct sparc_cpu_select *sel;
  int fpu;
  
#ifndef SPARC_BI_ARCH
  /* Check for unsupported architecture size.  */
  if (! TARGET_64BIT != DEFAULT_ARCH32_P)
    error ("%s is not supported by this configuration",
	   DEFAULT_ARCH32_P ? "-m64" : "-m32");
#endif

  /* We force all 64bit archs to use 128 bit long double */
  if (TARGET_64BIT && ! TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE_128)
    {
      error ("-mlong-double-64 not allowed with -m64");
      target_flags |= MASK_LONG_DOUBLE_128;
    }

  /* Code model selection.  */
  sparc_cmodel = SPARC_DEFAULT_CMODEL;
  
#ifdef SPARC_BI_ARCH
  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    sparc_cmodel = CM_32;
#endif

  if (sparc_cmodel_string != NULL)
    {
      if (TARGET_ARCH64)
	{
	  for (cmodel = &cmodels[0]; cmodel->name; cmodel++)
	    if (strcmp (sparc_cmodel_string, cmodel->name) == 0)
	      break;
	  if (cmodel->name == NULL)
	    error ("bad value (%s) for -mcmodel= switch", sparc_cmodel_string);
	  else
	    sparc_cmodel = cmodel->value;
	}
      else
	error ("-mcmodel= is not supported on 32 bit systems");
    }

  fpu = TARGET_FPU; /* save current -mfpu status */

  /* Set the default CPU.  */
  for (def = &cpu_default[0]; def->name; ++def)
    if (def->cpu == TARGET_CPU_DEFAULT)
      break;
  if (! def->name)
    abort ();
  sparc_select[0].string = def->name;

  for (sel = &sparc_select[0]; sel->name; ++sel)
    {
      if (sel->string)
	{
	  for (cpu = &cpu_table[0]; cpu->name; ++cpu)
	    if (! strcmp (sel->string, cpu->name))
	      {
		if (sel->set_tune_p)
		  sparc_cpu = cpu->processor;

		if (sel->set_arch_p)
		  {
		    target_flags &= ~cpu->disable;
		    target_flags |= cpu->enable;
		  }
		break;
	      }

	  if (! cpu->name)
	    error ("bad value (%s) for %s switch", sel->string, sel->name);
	}
    }

  /* If -mfpu or -mno-fpu was explicitly used, don't override with
     the processor default.  Clear MASK_FPU_SET to avoid confusing
     the reverse mapping from switch values to names.  */
  if (TARGET_FPU_SET)
    {
      target_flags = (target_flags & ~MASK_FPU) | fpu;
      target_flags &= ~MASK_FPU_SET;
    }

  /* Don't allow -mvis if FPU is disabled.  */
  if (! TARGET_FPU)
    target_flags &= ~MASK_VIS;

  /* -mvis assumes UltraSPARC+, so we are sure v9 instructions
     are available.
     -m64 also implies v9.  */
  if (TARGET_VIS || TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      target_flags |= MASK_V9;
      target_flags &= ~(MASK_V8 | MASK_SPARCLET | MASK_SPARCLITE);
    }

  /* Use the deprecated v8 insns for sparc64 in 32 bit mode.  */
  if (TARGET_V9 && TARGET_ARCH32)
    target_flags |= MASK_DEPRECATED_V8_INSNS;

  /* V8PLUS requires V9, makes no sense in 64 bit mode.  */
  if (! TARGET_V9 || TARGET_ARCH64)
    target_flags &= ~MASK_V8PLUS;

  /* Don't use stack biasing in 32 bit mode.  */
  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    target_flags &= ~MASK_STACK_BIAS;
    
  /* Supply a default value for align_functions.  */
  if (align_functions == 0
      && (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
	  || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3))
    align_functions = 32;

  /* Validate PCC_STRUCT_RETURN.  */
  if (flag_pcc_struct_return == DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN)
    flag_pcc_struct_return = (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 1);

  /* Only use .uaxword when compiling for a 64-bit target.  */
  if (!TARGET_ARCH64)
    targetm.asm_out.unaligned_op.di = NULL;

  /* Do various machine dependent initializations.  */
  sparc_init_modes ();

  /* Set up function hooks.  */
  init_machine_status = sparc_init_machine_status;
}
\f
/* Miscellaneous utilities.  */

/* Nonzero if CODE, a comparison, is suitable for use in v9 conditional move
   or branch on register contents instructions.  */

int
v9_regcmp_p (enum rtx_code code)
{
  return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT
	  || code == LE || code == GT);
}

\f
/* Operand constraints.  */

/* Return nonzero only if OP is a register of mode MODE,
   or const0_rtx.  */

int
reg_or_0_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (register_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;
  if (op == const0_rtx)
    return 1;
  if (GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
      && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
      && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 0)
    return 1;
  if (fp_zero_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;
  return 0;
}

/* Return nonzero only if OP is const1_rtx.  */

int
const1_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return op == const1_rtx;
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point value with value 0.0.  */

int
fp_zero_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op)) != MODE_FLOAT)
    return 0;
  return op == CONST0_RTX (mode);
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a register operand in floating point register.  */

int
fp_register_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (! register_operand (op, mode))
    return 0;
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
  return GET_CODE (op) == REG && SPARC_FP_REG_P (REGNO (op));
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
   be loaded into an integer register using a single
   sethi instruction.  */

int
fp_sethi_p (rtx op)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    {
      REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
      long i;

      REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
      if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
	  ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
	return 0;
      REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
      if (SPARC_SETHI_P (i))
	return 1;
    }

  return 0;
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
   be loaded into an integer register using a single
   mov instruction.  */

int
fp_mov_p (rtx op)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    {
      REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
      long i;

      REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
      if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
	  ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
	return 0;
      REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
      if (SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
	return 1;
    }

  return 0;
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point constant which can
   be loaded into an integer register using a high/losum
   instruction sequence.  */

int
fp_high_losum_p (rtx op)
{
  /* The constraints calling this should only be in
     SFmode move insns, so any constant which cannot
     be moved using a single insn will do.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    {
      REAL_VALUE_TYPE r;
      long i;

      REAL_VALUE_FROM_CONST_DOUBLE (r, op);
      if (REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (r, dconst0) &&
	  ! REAL_VALUE_MINUS_ZERO (r))
	return 0;
      REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (r, i);
      if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (i)
          && ! SPARC_SIMM13_P (i))
	return 1;
    }

  return 0;
}

/* Nonzero if OP is an integer register.  */

int
intreg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (register_operand (op, SImode)
	  || (TARGET_ARCH64 && register_operand (op, DImode)));
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code register.  */

int
fcc_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  /* This can happen when recog is called from combine.  Op may be a MEM.
     Fail instead of calling abort in this case.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
    return 0;

  if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
    return 0;
  if (mode == VOIDmode
      && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
    return 0;

#if 0	/* ??? ==> 1 when %fcc0-3 are pseudos first.  See gen_compare_reg().  */
  if (reg_renumber == 0)
    return REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER;
  return REGNO_OK_FOR_CCFP_P (REGNO (op));
#else
  return (unsigned) REGNO (op) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG < 4;
#endif
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a floating point condition code fcc0 register.  */

int
fcc0_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  /* This can happen when recog is called from combine.  Op may be a MEM.
     Fail instead of calling abort in this case.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) != REG)
    return 0;

  if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
    return 0;
  if (mode == VOIDmode
      && (GET_MODE (op) != CCFPmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCFPEmode))
    return 0;

  return REGNO (op) == SPARC_FCC_REG;
}

/* Nonzero if OP is an integer or floating point condition code register.  */

int
icc_or_fcc_reg_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) == REG && REGNO (op) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
    {
      if (mode != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
	return 0;
      if (mode == VOIDmode
	  && GET_MODE (op) != CCmode && GET_MODE (op) != CCXmode)
	return 0;
      return 1;
    }

  return fcc_reg_operand (op, mode);
}

/* Nonzero if OP can appear as the dest of a RESTORE insn.  */
int
restore_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && GET_MODE (op) == mode
	  && (REGNO (op) < 8 || (REGNO (op) >= 24 && REGNO (op) < 32)));
}

/* Call insn on SPARC can take a PC-relative constant address, or any regular
   memory address.  */

int
call_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
    abort ();
  op = XEXP (op, 0);
  return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
}

int
call_operand_address (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (symbolic_operand (op, mode) || memory_address_p (Pmode, op));
}

/* If OP is a SYMBOL_REF of a thread-local symbol, return its TLS mode,
   otherwise return 0.  */

int
tls_symbolic_operand (rtx op)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != SYMBOL_REF)
    return 0;
  return SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op);
}

int
tgd_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC;
}

int
tld_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC;
}

int
tie_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC;
}

int
tle_symbolic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return tls_symbolic_operand (op) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC;
}

/* Returns 1 if OP is either a symbol reference or a sum of a symbol
   reference and a constant.  */

int
symbolic_operand (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  enum machine_mode omode = GET_MODE (op);

  if (omode != mode && omode != VOIDmode && mode != VOIDmode)
    return 0;

  switch (GET_CODE (op))
    {
    case SYMBOL_REF:
      return !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op);

    case LABEL_REF:
      return 1;

    case CONST:
      op = XEXP (op, 0);
      return (((GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
		&& !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (XEXP (op, 0)))
	       || GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == LABEL_REF)
	      && GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) == CONST_INT);

    default:
      return 0;
    }
}

/* Return truth value of statement that OP is a symbolic memory
   operand of mode MODE.  */

int
symbolic_memory_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);
  if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
    return 0;
  op = XEXP (op, 0);
  return ((GET_CODE (op) == SYMBOL_REF && !SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (op))
	  || GET_CODE (op) == CONST || GET_CODE (op) == HIGH
	  || GET_CODE (op) == LABEL_REF);
}

/* Return truth value of statement that OP is a LABEL_REF of mode MODE.  */

int
label_ref_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != LABEL_REF)
    return 0;
  if (GET_MODE (op) != mode)
    return 0;
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if the operand is an argument used in generating pic references
   in either the medium/low or medium/anywhere code models of sparc64.  */

int
sp64_medium_pic_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  /* Check for (const (minus (symbol_ref:GOT)
                             (const (minus (label) (pc))))).  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST)
    return 0;
  op = XEXP (op, 0);
  if (GET_CODE (op) != MINUS)
    return 0;
  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 0)) != SYMBOL_REF)
    return 0;
  /* ??? Ensure symbol is GOT.  */
  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (op, 1)) != CONST)
    return 0;
  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (op, 1), 0)) != MINUS)
    return 0;
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if the operand is a data segment reference.  This includes
   the readonly data segment, or in other words anything but the text segment.
   This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9.  These values
   are accessed with EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG.  */

int
data_segment_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  switch (GET_CODE (op))
    {
    case SYMBOL_REF :
      return ! SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
    case PLUS :
      /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
	 Fall through.  */
    case CONST :
      return data_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
    default :
      return 0;
    }
}

/* Return 1 if the operand is a text segment reference.
   This is needed in the medium/anywhere code model on v9.  */

int
text_segment_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  switch (GET_CODE (op))
    {
    case LABEL_REF :
      return 1;
    case SYMBOL_REF :
      return SYMBOL_REF_FUNCTION_P (op);
    case PLUS :
      /* Assume canonical format of symbol + constant.
	 Fall through.  */
    case CONST :
      return text_segment_operand (XEXP (op, 0), VOIDmode);
    default :
      return 0;
    }
}

/* Return 1 if the operand is either a register or a memory operand that is
   not symbolic.  */

int
reg_or_nonsymb_mem_operand (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (register_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;

  if (memory_operand (op, mode) && ! symbolic_memory_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

int
splittable_symbolic_memory_operand (rtx op,
				    enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
    return 0;
  if (! symbolic_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
    return 0;
  return 1;
}

int
splittable_immediate_memory_operand (rtx op,
				     enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != MEM)
    return 0;
  if (! immediate_operand (XEXP (op, 0), Pmode))
    return 0;
  return 1;
}

/* Return truth value of whether OP is EQ or NE.  */

int
eq_or_neq (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (GET_CODE (op) == EQ || GET_CODE (op) == NE);
}

/* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator, but not an EQ, NE, GEU,
   or LTU for non-floating-point.  We handle those specially.  */

int
normal_comp_operator (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);

  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
    return 0;

  if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPmode
      || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCFPEmode)
    return 1;

  return (code != NE && code != EQ && code != GEU && code != LTU);
}

/* Return 1 if this is a comparison operator.  This allows the use of
   MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns.  */

int
noov_compare_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);

  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
    return 0;

  if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CC_NOOVmode
      || GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
    /* These are the only branches which work with CC_NOOVmode.  */
    return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if this is a 64-bit comparison operator.  This allows the use of
   MATCH_OPERATOR to recognize all the branch insns.  */

int
noov_compare64_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);

  if (! TARGET_V9)
    return 0;

  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
    return 0;

  if (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCX_NOOVmode)
    /* These are the only branches which work with CCX_NOOVmode.  */
    return (code == EQ || code == NE || code == GE || code == LT);
  return (GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0)) == CCXmode);
}

/* Nonzero if OP is a comparison operator suitable for use in v9
   conditional move or branch on register contents instructions.  */

int
v9_regcmp_op (register rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);

  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) != '<')
    return 0;

  return v9_regcmp_p (code);
}

/* Return 1 if this is a SIGN_EXTEND or ZERO_EXTEND operation.  */

int
extend_op (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return GET_CODE (op) == SIGN_EXTEND || GET_CODE (op) == ZERO_EXTEND;
}

/* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can set
   the condition codes explicitly.  We do not include PLUS and MINUS
   because these require CC_NOOVmode, which we handle explicitly.  */

int
cc_arithop (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) == AND
      || GET_CODE (op) == IOR
      || GET_CODE (op) == XOR)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Return nonzero if OP is an operator of mode MODE which can bitwise
   complement its second operand and set the condition codes explicitly.  */

int
cc_arithopn (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  /* XOR is not here because combine canonicalizes (xor (not ...) ...)
     and (xor ... (not ...)) to (not (xor ...)).  */
  return (GET_CODE (op) == AND
	  || GET_CODE (op) == IOR);
}
\f
/* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
   signed 13 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable SImode operand for
   most 3 address instructions.  */

int
arith_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  if (register_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;
  if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
    return 0;
  return SMALL_INT32 (op);
}

/* Return true if OP is a constant 4096  */

int
arith_4096_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_CODE (op) != CONST_INT)
    return 0;
  else
    return INTVAL (op) == 4096;
}

/* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub */

int
arith_add_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return arith_operand (op, mode) || arith_4096_operand (op, mode);
}

/* Return true if OP is a CONST_INT or a CONST_DOUBLE which can fit in the
   immediate field of OR and XOR instructions.  Used for 64-bit
   constant formation patterns.  */
int
const64_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	   && SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op)))
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
	      && (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) ==
		  ((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0 ?
		   (HOST_WIDE_INT)-1 : 0)))
#endif
	  );
}

/* The same, but only for sethi instructions.  */
int
const64_high_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	   && (INTVAL (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
	   && SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
	   )
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
	      && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff) != 0
	      && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
}

/* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
   signed 11 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable SImode operand for
   the movcc instructions.  */

int
arith11_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (register_operand (op, mode)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM11_P (INTVAL (op))));
}

/* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT that can fit in a
   signed 10 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable SImode operand for
   the movrcc instructions.  */

int
arith10_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (register_operand (op, mode)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SPARC_SIMM10_P (INTVAL (op))));
}

/* Return true if OP is a register, is a CONST_INT that fits in a 13 bit
   immediate field, or is a CONST_DOUBLE whose both parts fit in a 13 bit
   immediate field.
   v9: Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
   can fit in a 13 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable DImode operand
   for most 3 address instructions.  */

int
arith_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (register_operand (op, mode)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
	  || (! TARGET_ARCH64
	      && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000)
	  || (TARGET_ARCH64
	      && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x1000) < 0x2000
	      && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
		   && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0x1000)
		  || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
		      && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x1000) == 0))));
}

/* Return true if OP is a constant 4096 for DImode on ARCH64 */

int
arith_double_4096_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (TARGET_ARCH64 &&
  	  ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (op) == 4096) ||
  	   (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE &&
  	    CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) == 4096 &&
  	    CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)));
}

/* Return true if OP is suitable as second operand for add/sub in DImode */

int
arith_double_add_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return arith_double_operand (op, mode) || arith_double_4096_operand (op, mode);
}

/* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
   can fit in an 11 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable DImode
   operand for the movcc instructions.  */
/* ??? Replace with arith11_operand?  */

int
arith11_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (register_operand (op, mode)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x400) < 0x800
	      && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
		   && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0x400)
		  || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
		      && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x400) == 0)))
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	      && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x400) < 0x800));
}

/* Return true if OP is a register, or is a CONST_INT or CONST_DOUBLE that
   can fit in an 10 bit immediate field.  This is an acceptable DImode
   operand for the movrcc instructions.  */
/* ??? Replace with arith10_operand?  */

int
arith10_double_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return (register_operand (op, mode)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
	      && (unsigned) (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) + 0x200) < 0x400
	      && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
		   && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0x200)
		  || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
		      && (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x200) == 0)))
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	      && (GET_MODE (op) == mode || GET_MODE (op) == VOIDmode)
	      && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) (INTVAL (op) + 0x200) < 0x400));
}

/* Return truth value of whether OP is an integer which fits the
   range constraining immediate operands in most three-address insns,
   which have a 13 bit immediate field.  */

int
small_int (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op));
}

int
small_int_or_double (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (op))
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
	      && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))));
}

/* Recognize operand values for the umul instruction.  That instruction sign
   extends immediate values just like all other sparc instructions, but
   interprets the extended result as an unsigned number.  */

int
uns_small_int (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT > 32
  /* All allowed constants will fit a CONST_INT.  */
  return (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	  && ((INTVAL (op) >= 0 && INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
	      || (INTVAL (op) >= 0xFFFFF000
                  && INTVAL (op) <= 0xFFFFFFFF)));
#else
  return ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT && (unsigned) INTVAL (op) < 0x1000)
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
	      && (unsigned) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) - 0xFFFFF000 < 0x1000));
#endif
}

int
uns_arith_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  return register_operand (op, mode) || uns_small_int (op, mode);
}

/* Return truth value of statement that OP is a call-clobbered register.  */
int
clobbered_register (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (GET_CODE (op) == REG && call_used_regs[REGNO (op)]);
}

/* Return 1 if OP is a valid operand for the source of a move insn.  */

int
input_operand (rtx op, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  /* If both modes are non-void they must be the same.  */
  if (mode != VOIDmode && GET_MODE (op) != VOIDmode && mode != GET_MODE (op))
    return 0;

  /* Accept CONSTANT_P_RTX, since it will be gone by CSE1 and result in 0/1.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) == CONSTANT_P_RTX)
    return 1;

  /* Allow any one instruction integer constant, and all CONST_INT
     variants when we are working in DImode and !arch64.  */
  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
      && ((GET_CODE (op) == CONST_INT
	   && (SPARC_SETHI_P (INTVAL (op) & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
	       || SPARC_SIMM13_P (INTVAL (op))
	       || (mode == DImode
		   && ! TARGET_ARCH64)))
	  || (TARGET_ARCH64
	      && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE
	      && ((CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
		   && SPARC_SETHI_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
		  ||
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
		  (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0
		   && SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op)))
#else
		  (SPARC_SIMM13_P (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op))
		   && (((CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) == 0
			&& CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == 0)
		       || (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op) == -1
			   && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op) & 0x80000000) != 0))
#endif
		  ))))
    return 1;

  /* If !arch64 and this is a DImode const, allow it so that
     the splits can be generated.  */
  if (! TARGET_ARCH64
      && mode == DImode
      && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    return 1;

  if (register_operand (op, mode))
    return 1;

  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
      && GET_CODE (op) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    return 1;

  /* If this is a SUBREG, look inside so that we handle
     paradoxical ones.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG)
    op = SUBREG_REG (op);

  /* Check for valid MEM forms.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
    {
      rtx inside = XEXP (op, 0);

      if (GET_CODE (inside) == LO_SUM)
	{
	  /* We can't allow these because all of the splits
	     (eventually as they trickle down into DFmode
	     splits) require offsettable memory references.  */
	  if (! TARGET_V9
	      && GET_MODE (op) == TFmode)
	    return 0;

	  return (register_operand (XEXP (inside, 0), Pmode)
		  && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (inside, 1)));
	}
      return memory_address_p (mode, inside);
    }

  return 0;
}

\f
/* We know it can't be done in one insn when we get here,
   the movsi expander guarantees this.  */
void
sparc_emit_set_const32 (rtx op0, rtx op1)
{
  enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (op0);
  rtx temp;

  if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
    {
      HOST_WIDE_INT value = INTVAL (op1);

      if (SPARC_SETHI_P (value & GET_MODE_MASK (mode))
	  || SPARC_SIMM13_P (value))
	abort ();
    }

  /* Full 2-insn decomposition is needed.  */
  if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
    temp = op0;
  else
    temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);

  if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
    {
      /* Emit them as real moves instead of a HIGH/LO_SUM,
	 this way CSE can see everything and reuse intermediate
	 values if it wants.  */
      if (TARGET_ARCH64
	  && HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT != 64
	  && (INTVAL (op1) & 0x80000000) != 0)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET
		   (VOIDmode, temp,
		    immed_double_const (INTVAL (op1) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff,
					0, DImode)));
      else
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
				GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1)
					 & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)));

      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
			      op0,
			      gen_rtx_IOR (mode, temp,
					   GEN_INT (INTVAL (op1) & 0x3ff))));
    }
  else
    {
      /* A symbol, emit in the traditional way.  */
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp,
			      gen_rtx_HIGH (mode, op1)));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
			      op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (mode, temp, op1)));

    }
}

\f
/* SPARC-v9 code-model support.  */
void
sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1, rtx temp1)
{
  rtx ti_temp1 = 0;

  if (temp1 && GET_MODE (temp1) == TImode)
    {
      ti_temp1 = temp1;
      temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1));
    }

  switch (sparc_cmodel)
    {
    case CM_MEDLOW:
      /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
	 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).

	 The executable must be in the low 4TB of the virtual address
	 space.

	 sethi	%hi(symbol), %temp
	 or	%temp, %lo(symbol), %reg  */
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1, gen_rtx_HIGH (DImode, op1)));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0, gen_rtx_LO_SUM (DImode, temp1, op1)));
      break;

    case CM_MEDMID:
      /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
	 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).

	 The executable must be in the low 16TB of the virtual address
	 space.

	 sethi	%h44(symbol), %temp1
	 or	%temp1, %m44(symbol), %temp2
	 sllx	%temp2, 12, %temp3
	 or	%temp3, %l44(symbol), %reg  */
      emit_insn (gen_seth44 (op0, op1));
      emit_insn (gen_setm44 (op0, op0, op1));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp1,
			      gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (12))));
      emit_insn (gen_setl44 (op0, temp1, op1));
      break;

    case CM_MEDANY:
      /* The range spanned by all instructions in the object is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB) and the distance from any instruction
	 to the location of the label _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ is less
	 than 2^31 bytes (2GB).

	 The executable can be placed anywhere in the virtual address
	 space.

	 sethi	%hh(symbol), %temp1
	 sethi	%lm(symbol), %temp2
	 or	%temp1, %hm(symbol), %temp3
	 or	%temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
	 sllx	%temp3, 32, %temp5
	 or	%temp4, %temp5, %reg  */

      /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
	 might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
	 it TImode).  Pick the other one to use as our scratch.  */
      if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
	{
	  if (ti_temp1)
	    temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
	  else
	    abort();
	}

      emit_insn (gen_sethh (op0, op1));
      emit_insn (gen_setlm (temp1, op1));
      emit_insn (gen_sethm (op0, op0, op1));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			      gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			      gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
      emit_insn (gen_setlo (op0, op0, op1));
      break;

    case CM_EMBMEDANY:
      /* Old old old backwards compatibility kruft here.
	 Essentially it is MEDLOW with a fixed 64-bit
	 virtual base added to all data segment addresses.
	 Text-segment stuff is computed like MEDANY, we can't
	 reuse the code above because the relocation knobs
	 look different.

	 Data segment:	sethi	%hi(symbol), %temp1
			or	%temp1, %lo(symbol), %temp2
			add	%temp2, EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, %reg

	 Text segment:	sethi	%uhi(symbol), %temp1
			sethi	%hi(symbol), %temp2
			or	%temp1, %ulo(symbol), %temp3
			or	%temp2, %lo(symbol), %temp4
			sllx	%temp3, 32, %temp5
			or	%temp4, %temp5, %reg  */
      if (data_segment_operand (op1, GET_MODE (op1)))
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_sethi (temp1, op1));
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_brsum (op0, temp1));
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_losum (op0, op0, op1));
	}
      else
	{
	  /* It is possible that one of the registers we got for operands[2]
	     might coincide with that of operands[0] (which is why we made
	     it TImode).  Pick the other one to use as our scratch.  */
	  if (rtx_equal_p (temp1, op0))
	    {
	      if (ti_temp1)
		temp1 = gen_rtx_REG (DImode, REGNO (temp1) + 1);
	      else
		abort();
	    }

	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textuhi (op0, op1));
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_texthi  (temp1, op1));
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textulo (op0, op0, op1));
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, op0, GEN_INT (32))));
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, op0, temp1)));
	  emit_insn (gen_embmedany_textlo  (op0, op0, op1));
	}
      break;

    default:
      abort();
    }
}

/* These avoid problems when cross compiling.  If we do not
   go through all this hair then the optimizer will see
   invalid REG_EQUAL notes or in some cases none at all.  */
static void sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static rtx gen_safe_SET64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static rtx gen_safe_OR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);
static rtx gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx, HOST_WIDE_INT);

#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
#define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x)		GEN_INT ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff)
#define GEN_INT64(__x)			GEN_INT (__x)
#else
#define GEN_HIGHINT64(__x) \
	immed_double_const ((__x) & ~(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x3ff, 0, DImode)
#define GEN_INT64(__x) \
	immed_double_const ((__x) & 0xffffffff, \
			    ((__x) & 0x80000000 ? -1 : 0), DImode)
#endif

/* The optimizer is not to assume anything about exactly
   which bits are set for a HIGH, they are unspecified.
   Unfortunately this leads to many missed optimizations
   during CSE.  We mask out the non-HIGH bits, and matches
   a plain movdi, to alleviate this problem.  */
static void
sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
{
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_HIGHINT64 (val)));
}

static rtx
gen_safe_SET64 (rtx dest, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
{
  return gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, GEN_INT64 (val));
}

static rtx
gen_safe_OR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
{
  return gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
}

static rtx
gen_safe_XOR64 (rtx src, HOST_WIDE_INT val)
{
  return gen_rtx_XOR (DImode, src, GEN_INT64 (val));
}

/* Worker routines for 64-bit constant formation on arch64.
   One of the key things to be doing in these emissions is
   to create as many temp REGs as possible.  This makes it
   possible for half-built constants to be used later when
   such values are similar to something required later on.
   Without doing this, the optimizer cannot see such
   opportunities.  */

static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx, rtx,
					   unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);

static void
sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (rtx op0, rtx temp,
			       unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits, int is_neg)
{
  unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits;

  if (is_neg)
    high_bits = (~low_bits) & 0xffffffff;
  else
    high_bits = low_bits;

  sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
  if (!is_neg)
    {
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			      gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
    }
  else
    {
      /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
	 instead.  This way the combiner will notice logical operations
	 such as ANDN later on and substitute.  */
      if ((low_bits & 0x3ff) == 0x3ff)
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
	}
      else
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
						  (-(HOST_WIDE_INT)0x400
						   | (low_bits & 0x3ff)))));
	}
    }
}

static void sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
					   unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, int);

static void
sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (rtx op0, rtx temp,
			       unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
			       unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_immediate,
			       int shift_count)
{
  rtx temp2 = op0;

  if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
    {
      sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
      if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
      else
	temp2 = temp;
    }
  else
    {
      emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
      temp2 = temp;
    }

  /* Now shift it up into place.  */
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			  gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp2,
					  GEN_INT (shift_count))));

  /* If there is a low immediate part piece, finish up by
     putting that in as well.  */
  if (low_immediate != 0)
    emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			    gen_safe_OR64 (op0, low_immediate)));
}

static void sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx, rtx, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
					    unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);

/* Full 64-bit constant decomposition.  Even though this is the
   'worst' case, we still optimize a few things away.  */
static void
sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (rtx op0, rtx temp,
				unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
				unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits)
{
  rtx sub_temp;

  if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
    sub_temp = op0;
  else
    sub_temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);

  if ((high_bits & 0xfffffc00) != 0)
    {
      sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, high_bits);
      if ((high_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				sub_temp,
				gen_safe_OR64 (temp, (high_bits & 0x3ff))));
      else
	sub_temp = temp;
    }
  else
    {
      emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, high_bits));
      sub_temp = temp;
    }

  if (!reload_in_progress && !reload_completed)
    {
      rtx temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
      rtx temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
      rtx temp4 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);

      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp4,
			      gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
					      GEN_INT (32))));

      sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp2, low_bits);
      if ((low_bits & ~0xfffffc00) != 0)
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, temp3,
				  gen_safe_OR64 (temp2, (low_bits & 0x3ff))));
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp3)));
	}
      else
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_PLUS (DImode, temp4, temp2)));
	}
    }
  else
    {
      rtx low1 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12))          & 0xfff);
      rtx low2 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12))     & 0xfff);
      rtx low3 = GEN_INT ((low_bits >> (32 - 12 - 12 - 8)) & 0x0ff);
      int to_shift = 12;

      /* We are in the middle of reload, so this is really
	 painful.  However we do still make an attempt to
	 avoid emitting truly stupid code.  */
      if (low1 != const0_rtx)
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
						  GEN_INT (to_shift))));
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low1)));
	  sub_temp = op0;
	  to_shift = 12;
	}
      else
	{
	  to_shift += 12;
	}
      if (low2 != const0_rtx)
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
						  GEN_INT (to_shift))));
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low2)));
	  sub_temp = op0;
	  to_shift = 8;
	}
      else
	{
	  to_shift += 8;
	}
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
			      gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, sub_temp,
					      GEN_INT (to_shift))));
      if (low3 != const0_rtx)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				gen_rtx_IOR (DImode, op0, low3)));
      /* phew...  */
    }
}

/* Analyze a 64-bit constant for certain properties.  */
static void analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
				    unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
				    int *, int *, int *);

static void
analyze_64bit_constant (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
			unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits,
			int *hbsp, int *lbsp, int *abbasp)
{
  int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;
  int i;

  lowest_bit_set = highest_bit_set = -1;
  i = 0;
  do
    {
      if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
	  && ((low_bits >> i) & 1))
	lowest_bit_set = i;
      if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
	  && ((high_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
	highest_bit_set = (64 - i - 1);
    }
  while (++i < 32
	 && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
	     || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
  if (i == 32)
    {
      i = 0;
      do
	{
	  if ((lowest_bit_set == -1)
	      && ((high_bits >> i) & 1))
	    lowest_bit_set = i + 32;
	  if ((highest_bit_set == -1)
	      && ((low_bits >> (32 - i - 1)) & 1))
	    highest_bit_set = 32 - i - 1;
	}
      while (++i < 32
	     && ((highest_bit_set == -1)
		 || (lowest_bit_set == -1)));
    }
  /* If there are no bits set this should have gone out
     as one instruction!  */
  if (lowest_bit_set == -1
      || highest_bit_set == -1)
    abort ();
  all_bits_between_are_set = 1;
  for (i = lowest_bit_set; i <= highest_bit_set; i++)
    {
      if (i < 32)
	{
	  if ((low_bits & (1 << i)) != 0)
	    continue;
	}
      else
	{
	  if ((high_bits & (1 << (i - 32))) != 0)
	    continue;
	}
      all_bits_between_are_set = 0;
      break;
    }
  *hbsp = highest_bit_set;
  *lbsp = lowest_bit_set;
  *abbasp = all_bits_between_are_set;
}

static int const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT);

static int
const64_is_2insns (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
		   unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits)
{
  int highest_bit_set, lowest_bit_set, all_bits_between_are_set;

  if (high_bits == 0
      || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
    return 1;

  analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
			  &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
			  &all_bits_between_are_set);

  if ((highest_bit_set == 63
       || lowest_bit_set == 0)
      && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
    return 1;

  if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
							unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT,
							int, int);

static unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT
create_simple_focus_bits (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits,
			  unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT low_bits,
			  int lowest_bit_set, int shift)
{
  HOST_WIDE_INT hi, lo;

  if (lowest_bit_set < 32)
    {
      lo = (low_bits >> lowest_bit_set) << shift;
      hi = ((high_bits << (32 - lowest_bit_set)) << shift);
    }
  else
    {
      lo = 0;
      hi = ((high_bits >> (lowest_bit_set - 32)) << shift);
    }
  if (hi & lo)
    abort ();
  return (hi | lo);
}

/* Here we are sure to be arch64 and this is an integer constant
   being loaded into a register.  Emit the most efficient
   insn sequence possible.  Detection of all the 1-insn cases
   has been done already.  */
void
sparc_emit_set_const64 (rtx op0, rtx op1)
{
  unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT high_bits, low_bits;
  int lowest_bit_set, highest_bit_set;
  int all_bits_between_are_set;
  rtx temp;

  /* Sanity check that we know what we are working with.  */
  if (! TARGET_ARCH64)
    abort ();

  if (GET_CODE (op0) != SUBREG)
    {
      if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG
	  || (REGNO (op0) >= SPARC_FIRST_FP_REG
	      && REGNO (op0) <= SPARC_LAST_V9_FP_REG))
	abort ();
    }

  if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
    temp = op0;
  else
    temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);

  if (GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_DOUBLE
      && GET_CODE (op1) != CONST_INT)
    {
      sparc_emit_set_symbolic_const64 (op0, op1, temp);
      return;
    }

  if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    {
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
      high_bits = (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff;
      low_bits  = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1) & 0xffffffff;
#else
      high_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (op1);
      low_bits = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (op1);
#endif
    }
  else
    {
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
      high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) >> 32) & 0xffffffff);
      low_bits = (INTVAL (op1) & 0xffffffff);
#else
      high_bits = ((INTVAL (op1) < 0) ?
		   0xffffffff :
		   0x00000000);
      low_bits = INTVAL (op1);
#endif
    }

  /* low_bits	bits 0  --> 31
     high_bits	bits 32 --> 63  */

  analyze_64bit_constant (high_bits, low_bits,
			  &highest_bit_set, &lowest_bit_set,
			  &all_bits_between_are_set);

  /* First try for a 2-insn sequence.  */

  /* These situations are preferred because the optimizer can
   * do more things with them:
   * 1) mov	-1, %reg
   *    sllx	%reg, shift, %reg
   * 2) mov	-1, %reg
   *    srlx	%reg, shift, %reg
   * 3) mov	some_small_const, %reg
   *    sllx	%reg, shift, %reg
   */
  if (((highest_bit_set == 63
	|| lowest_bit_set == 0)
       && all_bits_between_are_set != 0)
      || ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 12))
    {
      HOST_WIDE_INT the_const = -1;
      int shift = lowest_bit_set;

      if ((highest_bit_set != 63
	   && lowest_bit_set != 0)
	  || all_bits_between_are_set == 0)
	{
	  the_const =
	    create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
				      lowest_bit_set, 0);
	}
      else if (lowest_bit_set == 0)
	shift = -(63 - highest_bit_set);

      if (! SPARC_SIMM13_P (the_const))
	abort ();

      emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, the_const));
      if (shift > 0)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				op0,
				gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode,
						temp,
						GEN_INT (shift))));
      else if (shift < 0)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				op0,
				gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode,
						  temp,
						  GEN_INT (-shift))));
      else
	abort ();
      return;
    }

  /* Now a range of 22 or less bits set somewhere.
   * 1) sethi	%hi(focus_bits), %reg
   *    sllx	%reg, shift, %reg
   * 2) sethi	%hi(focus_bits), %reg
   *    srlx	%reg, shift, %reg
   */
  if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 21)
    {
      unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
	create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
				  lowest_bit_set, 10);

      if (! SPARC_SETHI_P (focus_bits))
	 abort ();

      sparc_emit_set_safe_HIGH64 (temp, focus_bits);

      /* If lowest_bit_set == 10 then a sethi alone could have done it.  */
      if (lowest_bit_set < 10)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				op0,
				gen_rtx_LSHIFTRT (DImode, temp,
						  GEN_INT (10 - lowest_bit_set))));
      else if (lowest_bit_set > 10)
	emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				op0,
				gen_rtx_ASHIFT (DImode, temp,
						GEN_INT (lowest_bit_set - 10))));
      else
	abort ();
      return;
    }

  /* 1) sethi	%hi(low_bits), %reg
   *    or	%reg, %lo(low_bits), %reg
   * 2) sethi	%hi(~low_bits), %reg
   *	xor	%reg, %lo(-0x400 | (low_bits & 0x3ff)), %reg
   */
  if (high_bits == 0
      || high_bits == 0xffffffff)
    {
      sparc_emit_set_const64_quick1 (op0, temp, low_bits,
				     (high_bits == 0xffffffff));
      return;
    }

  /* Now, try 3-insn sequences.  */

  /* 1) sethi	%hi(high_bits), %reg
   *    or	%reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
   *    sllx	%reg, 32, %reg
   */
  if (low_bits == 0)
    {
      sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, 0, 32);
      return;
    }

  /* We may be able to do something quick
     when the constant is negated, so try that.  */
  if (const64_is_2insns ((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
			 (~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00))
    {
      /* NOTE: The trailing bits get XOR'd so we need the
	 non-negated bits, not the negated ones.  */
      unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT trailing_bits = low_bits & 0x3ff;

      if ((((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0
	   && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) == 0)
	  || (((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff) == 0xffffffff
	      && ((~low_bits) & 0x80000000) != 0))
	{
	  int fast_int = (~low_bits & 0xffffffff);

	  if ((SPARC_SETHI_P (fast_int)
	       && (~high_bits & 0xffffffff) == 0)
	      || SPARC_SIMM13_P (fast_int))
	    emit_insn (gen_safe_SET64 (temp, fast_int));
	  else
	    sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, GEN_INT64 (fast_int));
	}
      else
	{
	  rtx negated_const;
#if HOST_BITS_PER_WIDE_INT == 64
	  negated_const = GEN_INT (((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00) |
				   (((HOST_WIDE_INT)((~high_bits) & 0xffffffff))<<32));
#else
	  negated_const = immed_double_const ((~low_bits) & 0xfffffc00,
					      (~high_bits) & 0xffffffff,
					      DImode);
#endif
	  sparc_emit_set_const64 (temp, negated_const);
	}

      /* If we are XOR'ing with -1, then we should emit a one's complement
	 instead.  This way the combiner will notice logical operations
	 such as ANDN later on and substitute.  */
      if (trailing_bits == 0x3ff)
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, op0,
				  gen_rtx_NOT (DImode, temp)));
	}
      else
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
				  op0,
				  gen_safe_XOR64 (temp,
						  (-0x400 | trailing_bits))));
	}
      return;
    }

  /* 1) sethi	%hi(xxx), %reg
   *    or	%reg, %lo(xxx), %reg
   *	sllx	%reg, yyy, %reg
   *
   * ??? This is just a generalized version of the low_bits==0
   * thing above, FIXME...
   */
  if ((highest_bit_set - lowest_bit_set) < 32)
    {
      unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT focus_bits =
	create_simple_focus_bits (high_bits, low_bits,
				  lowest_bit_set, 0);

      /* We can't get here in this state.  */
      if (highest_bit_set < 32
	  || lowest_bit_set >= 32)
	abort ();

      /* So what we know is that the set bits straddle the
	 middle of the 64-bit word.  */
      sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp,
				     focus_bits, 0,
				     lowest_bit_set);
      return;
    }

  /* 1) sethi	%hi(high_bits), %reg
   *    or	%reg, %lo(high_bits), %reg
   *    sllx	%reg, 32, %reg
   *	or	%reg, low_bits, %reg
   */
  if (SPARC_SIMM13_P(low_bits)
      && ((int)low_bits > 0))
    {
      sparc_emit_set_const64_quick2 (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits, 32);
      return;
    }

  /* The easiest way when all else fails, is full decomposition.  */
#if 0
  printf ("sparc_emit_set_const64: Hard constant [%08lx%08lx] neg[%08lx%08lx]\n",
	  high_bits, low_bits, ~high_bits, ~low_bits);
#endif
  sparc_emit_set_const64_longway (op0, temp, high_bits, low_bits);
}

/* Given a comparison code (EQ, NE, etc.) and the first operand of a COMPARE,
   return the mode to be used for the comparison.  For floating-point,
   CCFP[E]mode is used.  CC_NOOVmode should be used when the first operand
   is a PLUS, MINUS, NEG, or ASHIFT.  CCmode should be used when no special
   processing is needed.  */

enum machine_mode
select_cc_mode (enum rtx_code op, rtx x, rtx y ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
    {
      switch (op)
	{
	case EQ:
	case NE:
	case UNORDERED:
	case ORDERED:
	case UNLT:
	case UNLE:
	case UNGT:
	case UNGE:
	case UNEQ:
	case LTGT:
	  return CCFPmode;

	case LT:
	case LE:
	case GT:
	case GE:
	  return CCFPEmode;

	default:
	  abort ();
	}
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS || GET_CODE (x) == MINUS
	   || GET_CODE (x) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT)
    {
      if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
	return CCX_NOOVmode;
      else
	return CC_NOOVmode;
    }
  else
    {
      if (TARGET_ARCH64 && GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
	return CCXmode;
      else
	return CCmode;
    }
}

/* X and Y are two things to compare using CODE.  Emit the compare insn and
   return the rtx for the cc reg in the proper mode.  */

rtx
gen_compare_reg (enum rtx_code code, rtx x, rtx y)
{
  enum machine_mode mode = SELECT_CC_MODE (code, x, y);
  rtx cc_reg;

  /* ??? We don't have movcc patterns so we cannot generate pseudo regs for the
     fcc regs (cse can't tell they're really call clobbered regs and will
     remove a duplicate comparison even if there is an intervening function
     call - it will then try to reload the cc reg via an int reg which is why
     we need the movcc patterns).  It is possible to provide the movcc
     patterns by using the ldxfsr/stxfsr v9 insns.  I tried it: you need two
     registers (say %g1,%g5) and it takes about 6 insns.  A better fix would be
     to tell cse that CCFPE mode registers (even pseudos) are call
     clobbered.  */

  /* ??? This is an experiment.  Rather than making changes to cse which may
     or may not be easy/clean, we do our own cse.  This is possible because
     we will generate hard registers.  Cse knows they're call clobbered (it
     doesn't know the same thing about pseudos). If we guess wrong, no big
     deal, but if we win, great!  */

  if (TARGET_V9 && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
#if 1 /* experiment */
    {
      int reg;
      /* We cycle through the registers to ensure they're all exercised.  */
      static int next_fcc_reg = 0;
      /* Previous x,y for each fcc reg.  */
      static rtx prev_args[4][2];

      /* Scan prev_args for x,y.  */
      for (reg = 0; reg < 4; reg++)
	if (prev_args[reg][0] == x && prev_args[reg][1] == y)
	  break;
      if (reg == 4)
	{
	  reg = next_fcc_reg;
	  prev_args[reg][0] = x;
	  prev_args[reg][1] = y;
	  next_fcc_reg = (next_fcc_reg + 1) & 3;
	}
      cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, reg + SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG);
    }
#else
    cc_reg = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
#endif /* ! experiment */
  else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_FLOAT)
    cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_FCC_REG);
  else
    cc_reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, SPARC_ICC_REG);

  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, cc_reg,
			  gen_rtx_COMPARE (mode, x, y)));

  return cc_reg;
}

/* This function is used for v9 only.
   CODE is the code for an Scc's comparison.
   OPERANDS[0] is the target of the Scc insn.
   OPERANDS[1] is the value we compare against const0_rtx (which hasn't
   been generated yet).

   This function is needed to turn

	   (set (reg:SI 110)
	       (gt (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
	           (const_int 0)))
   into
	   (set (reg:SI 110)
	       (gt:DI (reg:CCX 100 %icc)
	           (const_int 0)))

   IE: The instruction recognizer needs to see the mode of the comparison to
   find the right instruction. We could use "gt:DI" right in the
   define_expand, but leaving it out allows us to handle DI, SI, etc.

   We refer to the global sparc compare operands sparc_compare_op0 and
   sparc_compare_op1.  */

int
gen_v9_scc (enum rtx_code compare_code, register rtx *operands)
{
  rtx temp, op0, op1;

  if (! TARGET_ARCH64
      && (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0) == DImode
	  || GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode))
    return 0;

  op0 = sparc_compare_op0;
  op1 = sparc_compare_op1;

  /* Try to use the movrCC insns.  */
  if (TARGET_ARCH64
      && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (op0)) == MODE_INT
      && op1 == const0_rtx
      && v9_regcmp_p (compare_code))
    {
      /* Special case for op0 != 0.  This can be done with one instruction if
	 operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0.  */

      if (compare_code == NE
	  && GET_MODE (operands[0]) == DImode
	  && rtx_equal_p (op0, operands[0]))
	{
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
			      gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (DImode,
				       gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
						       op0, const0_rtx),
				       const1_rtx,
				       operands[0])));
	  return 1;
	}

      if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (operands[0], op0))
	{
	  /* Handle the case where operands[0] == sparc_compare_op0.
	     We "early clobber" the result.  */
	  op0 = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (sparc_compare_op0));
	  emit_move_insn (op0, sparc_compare_op0);
	}

      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
      if (GET_MODE (op0) != DImode)
	{
	  temp = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
	  convert_move (temp, op0, 0);
	}
      else
	temp = op0;
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
			  gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
				   gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code, DImode,
						   temp, const0_rtx),
				   const1_rtx,
				   operands[0])));
      return 1;
    }
  else
    {
      operands[1] = gen_compare_reg (compare_code, op0, op1);

      switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
	{
	  case CCmode :
	  case CCXmode :
	  case CCFPEmode :
	  case CCFPmode :
	    break;
	  default :
	    abort ();
	}
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0], const0_rtx));
      emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, operands[0],
			  gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (GET_MODE (operands[0]),
				   gen_rtx_fmt_ee (compare_code,
						   GET_MODE (operands[1]),
						   operands[1], const0_rtx),
				    const1_rtx, operands[0])));
      return 1;
    }
}

/* Emit a conditional jump insn for the v9 architecture using comparison code
   CODE and jump target LABEL.
   This function exists to take advantage of the v9 brxx insns.  */

void
emit_v9_brxx_insn (enum rtx_code code, rtx op0, rtx label)
{
  emit_jump_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode,
			   pc_rtx,
			   gen_rtx_IF_THEN_ELSE (VOIDmode,
				    gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (op0),
						    op0, const0_rtx),
				    gen_rtx_LABEL_REF (VOIDmode, label),
				    pc_rtx)));
}

/* Generate a DFmode part of a hard TFmode register.
   REG is the TFmode hard register, LOW is 1 for the
   low 64bit of the register and 0 otherwise.
 */
rtx
gen_df_reg (rtx reg, int low)
{
  int regno = REGNO (reg);

  if ((WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN == 0) ^ (low != 0))
    regno += (TARGET_ARCH64 && regno < 32) ? 1 : 2;
  return gen_rtx_REG (DFmode, regno);
}
\f
/* Generate a call to FUNC with OPERANDS.  Operand 0 is the return value.
   Unlike normal calls, TFmode operands are passed by reference.  It is
   assumed that no more than 3 operands are required.  */

static void
emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (const char *func_name, int nargs, rtx *operands)
{
  rtx ret_slot = NULL, arg[3], func_sym;
  int i;

  /* We only expect to be called for conversions, unary, and binary ops.  */
  if (nargs < 2 || nargs > 3)
    abort ();

  for (i = 0; i < nargs; ++i)
    {
      rtx this_arg = operands[i];
      rtx this_slot;

      /* TFmode arguments and return values are passed by reference.  */
      if (GET_MODE (this_arg) == TFmode)
	{
	  int force_stack_temp;

	  force_stack_temp = 0;
	  if (TARGET_BUGGY_QP_LIB && i == 0)
	    force_stack_temp = 1;

	  if (GET_CODE (this_arg) == MEM
	      && ! force_stack_temp)
	    this_arg = XEXP (this_arg, 0);
	  else if (CONSTANT_P (this_arg)
		   && ! force_stack_temp)
	    {
	      this_slot = force_const_mem (TFmode, this_arg);
	      this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      this_slot = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE (TFmode), 0);

	      /* Operand 0 is the return value.  We'll copy it out later.  */
	      if (i > 0)
		emit_move_insn (this_slot, this_arg);
	      else
		ret_slot = this_slot;

	      this_arg = XEXP (this_slot, 0);
	    }
	}

      arg[i] = this_arg;
    }

  func_sym = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, func_name);

  if (GET_MODE (operands[0]) == TFmode)
    {
      if (nargs == 2)
	emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 2,
			   arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
			   arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));
      else
	emit_library_call (func_sym, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 3,
			   arg[0], GET_MODE (arg[0]),
			   arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]),
			   arg[2], GET_MODE (arg[2]));

      if (ret_slot)
	emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret_slot);
    }
  else
    {
      rtx ret;

      if (nargs != 2)
	abort ();

      ret = emit_library_call_value (func_sym, operands[0], LCT_NORMAL,
				     GET_MODE (operands[0]), 1,
				     arg[1], GET_MODE (arg[1]));

      if (ret != operands[0])
	emit_move_insn (operands[0], ret);
    }
}

/* Expand soft-float TFmode calls to sparc abi routines.  */

static void
emit_soft_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  const char *func;

  switch (code)
    {
    case PLUS:
      func = "_Qp_add";
      break;
    case MINUS:
      func = "_Qp_sub";
      break;
    case MULT:
      func = "_Qp_mul";
      break;
    case DIV:
      func = "_Qp_div";
      break;
    default:
      abort ();
    }

  emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 3, operands);
}

static void
emit_soft_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  const char *func;

  switch (code)
    {
    case SQRT:
      func = "_Qp_sqrt";
      break;
    default:
      abort ();
    }

  emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
}

static void
emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  const char *func;

  switch (code)
    {
    case FLOAT_EXTEND:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
	{
	case SFmode:
	  func = "_Qp_stoq";
	  break;
	case DFmode:
	  func = "_Qp_dtoq";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
	{
	case SFmode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtos";
	  break;
	case DFmode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtod";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    case FLOAT:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
	{
	case SImode:
	  func = "_Qp_itoq";
	  break;
	case DImode:
	  func = "_Qp_xtoq";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[1]))
	{
	case SImode:
	  func = "_Qp_uitoq";
	  break;
	case DImode:
	  func = "_Qp_uxtoq";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    case FIX:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
	{
	case SImode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtoi";
	  break;
	case DImode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtox";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    case UNSIGNED_FIX:
      switch (GET_MODE (operands[0]))
	{
	case SImode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtoui";
	  break;
	case DImode:
	  func = "_Qp_qtoux";
	  break;
	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      break;

    default:
      abort ();
    }

  emit_soft_tfmode_libcall (func, 2, operands);
}

/* Expand a hard-float tfmode operation.  All arguments must be in
   registers.  */

static void
emit_hard_tfmode_operation (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  rtx op, dest;

  if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == '1')
    {
      operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
      op = gen_rtx_fmt_e (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]), operands[1]);
    }
  else
    {
      operands[1] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[1]), operands[1]);
      operands[2] = force_reg (GET_MODE (operands[2]), operands[2]);
      op = gen_rtx_fmt_ee (code, GET_MODE (operands[0]),
			   operands[1], operands[2]);
    }

  if (register_operand (operands[0], VOIDmode))
    dest = operands[0];
  else
    dest = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (operands[0]));

  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, dest, op));

  if (dest != operands[0])
    emit_move_insn (operands[0], dest);
}

void
emit_tfmode_binop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
    emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
  else
    emit_soft_tfmode_binop (code, operands);
}

void
emit_tfmode_unop (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
    emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
  else
    emit_soft_tfmode_unop (code, operands);
}

void
emit_tfmode_cvt (enum rtx_code code, rtx *operands)
{
  if (TARGET_HARD_QUAD)
    emit_hard_tfmode_operation (code, operands);
  else
    emit_soft_tfmode_cvt (code, operands);
}
\f
/* Return nonzero if a return peephole merging return with
   setting of output register is ok.  */
int
leaf_return_peephole_ok (void)
{
  return (actual_fsize == 0);
}

/* Return nonzero if a branch/jump/call instruction will be emitting
   nop into its delay slot.  */

int
empty_delay_slot (rtx insn)
{
  rtx seq;

  /* If no previous instruction (should not happen), return true.  */
  if (PREV_INSN (insn) == NULL)
    return 1;

  seq = NEXT_INSN (PREV_INSN (insn));
  if (GET_CODE (PATTERN (seq)) == SEQUENCE)
    return 0;

  return 1;
}

/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the function epilogue's
   delay slot.  SLOT is the slot we are trying to fill.  */

int
eligible_for_epilogue_delay (rtx trial, int slot)
{
  rtx pat, src;

  if (slot >= 1)
    return 0;

  if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
    return 0;

  if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
    return 0;

  /* If there are any call-saved registers, we should scan TRIAL if it
     does not reference them.  For now just make it easy.  */
  if (num_gfregs)
    return 0;

  /* If the function uses __builtin_eh_return, the eh_return machinery
     occupies the delay slot.  */
  if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
    return 0;

  /* In the case of a true leaf function, anything can go into the delay slot.
     A delay slot only exists however if the frame size is zero, otherwise
     we will put an insn to adjust the stack after the return.  */
  if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
    {
      if (leaf_return_peephole_ok ())
	return ((get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial)
		 == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE));
      return 0;
    }

  pat = PATTERN (trial);

  /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
     a `restore' or `return' insn can go into the delay slot.  */
  if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
      || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24)
    return 0;

  /* If this instruction sets up floating point register and we have a return
     instruction, it can probably go in.  But restore will not work
     with FP_REGS.  */
  if (REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
    {
      if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
	  && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
	return 1;
      return 0;
    }

  /* The set of insns matched here must agree precisely with the set of
     patterns paired with a RETURN in sparc.md.  */

  src = SET_SRC (pat);

  /* This matches "*return_[qhs]i" or even "*return_di" on TARGET_ARCH64.  */
  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
      && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
    {
      if (TARGET_ARCH64)
        return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
      else
        return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
    }

  /* This matches "*return_di".  */
  else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
	   && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
    return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);

  /* This matches "*return_sf_no_fpu".  */
  else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
	   && register_operand (src, SFmode))
    return 1;

  /* If we have return instruction, anything that does not use
     local or output registers and can go into a delay slot wins.  */
  else if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&pat, 1)
	   && (get_attr_in_uncond_branch_delay (trial) == IN_BRANCH_DELAY_TRUE))
    return 1;

  /* This matches "*return_addsi".  */
  else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
	   && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	   && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
    return 1;

  /* This matches "*return_adddi".  */
  else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
	   && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
	   && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
    return 1;

  /* This can match "*return_losum_[sd]i".
     Catch only some cases, so that return_losum* don't have
     to be too big.  */
  else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
	   && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
	   && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	        && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
	       || (TARGET_ARCH64
		   && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
		   && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
    return 1;

  /* sll{,x} reg,1,reg2 is add reg,reg,reg2 as well.  */
  else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
	   && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the call delay slot.  */
int
tls_call_delay (rtx trial)
{
  rtx pat, unspec;

  /* Binutils allows
     call __tls_get_addr, %tgd_call (foo)
      add %l7, %o0, %o0, %tgd_add (foo)
     while Sun as/ld does not.  */
  if (TARGET_GNU_TLS || !TARGET_TLS)
    return 1;

  pat = PATTERN (trial);
  if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != PLUS)
    return 1;

  unspec = XEXP (SET_DEST (pat), 1);
  if (GET_CODE (unspec) != UNSPEC
      || (XINT (unspec, 1) != UNSPEC_TLSGD
	  && XINT (unspec, 1) != UNSPEC_TLSLDM))
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Return nonzero if TRIAL can go into the sibling call
   delay slot.  */

int
eligible_for_sibcall_delay (rtx trial)
{
  rtx pat, src;

  if (GET_CODE (trial) != INSN || GET_CODE (PATTERN (trial)) != SET)
    return 0;

  if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
    return 0;

  pat = PATTERN (trial);

  if (current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs)
    {
      /* If the tail call is done using the call instruction,
	 we have to restore %o7 in the delay slot.  */
      if ((TARGET_ARCH64 && ! TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) || flag_pic)
	return 0;

      /* %g1 is used to build the function address */
      if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1), pat))
	return 0;

      return 1;
    }

  /* Otherwise, only operations which can be done in tandem with
     a `restore' insn can go into the delay slot.  */
  if (GET_CODE (SET_DEST (pat)) != REG
      || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) < 24
      || REGNO (SET_DEST (pat)) >= 32)
    return 0;

  /* If it mentions %o7, it can't go in, because sibcall will clobber it
     in most cases.  */
  if (reg_mentioned_p (gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 15), pat))
    return 0;

  src = SET_SRC (pat);

  if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
      && arith_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
    {
      if (TARGET_ARCH64)
        return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);
      else
        return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (SImode);
    }

  else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (src)) != MODE_FLOAT
	   && arith_double_operand (src, GET_MODE (src)))
    return GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (src)) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (DImode);

  else if (! TARGET_FPU && restore_operand (SET_DEST (pat), SFmode)
	   && register_operand (src, SFmode))
    return 1;

  else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
	   && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	   && arith_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode)))
    return 1;

  else if (GET_CODE (src) == PLUS
	   && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
	   && arith_double_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode)))
    return 1;

  else if (GET_CODE (src) == LO_SUM
	   && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
	   && ((register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	        && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), SImode))
	       || (TARGET_ARCH64
		   && register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode)
		   && immediate_operand (XEXP (src, 1), DImode))))
    return 1;

  else if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT
	   && (register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), SImode)
	       || register_operand (XEXP (src, 0), DImode))
	   && XEXP (src, 1) == const1_rtx)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

static int
check_return_regs (rtx x)
{
  switch (GET_CODE (x))
    {
    case REG:
      return IN_OR_GLOBAL_P (x);

    case CONST_INT:
    case CONST_DOUBLE:
    case CONST:
    case SYMBOL_REF:
    case LABEL_REF:
    return 1;

    case SET:
    case IOR:
    case AND:
    case XOR:
    case PLUS:
    case MINUS:
      if (check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 1)) == 0)
  return 0;
    case NOT:
    case NEG:
    case MEM:
      return check_return_regs (XEXP (x, 0));
      
    default:
      return 0;
    }

}

int
short_branch (int uid1, int uid2)
{
  int delta = INSN_ADDRESSES (uid1) - INSN_ADDRESSES (uid2);

  /* Leave a few words of "slop".  */
  if (delta >= -1023 && delta <= 1022)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Return nonzero if REG is not used after INSN.
   We assume REG is a reload reg, and therefore does
   not live past labels or calls or jumps.  */
int
reg_unused_after (rtx reg, rtx insn)
{
  enum rtx_code code, prev_code = UNKNOWN;

  while ((insn = NEXT_INSN (insn)))
    {
      if (prev_code == CALL_INSN && call_used_regs[REGNO (reg)])
	return 1;

      code = GET_CODE (insn);
      if (GET_CODE (insn) == CODE_LABEL)
	return 1;

      if (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == 'i')
	{
	  rtx set = single_set (insn);
	  int in_src = set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_SRC (set));
	  if (set && in_src)
	    return 0;
	  if (set && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, SET_DEST (set)))
	    return 1;
	  if (set == 0 && reg_overlap_mentioned_p (reg, PATTERN (insn)))
	    return 0;
	}
      prev_code = code;
    }
  return 1;
}
\f
/* Determine if it's legal to put X into the constant pool.  This
   is not possible if X contains the address of a symbol that is
   not constant (TLS) or not known at final link time (PIC).  */

static bool
sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (rtx x)
{
  switch (GET_CODE (x))
    {
    case CONST_INT:
    case CONST_DOUBLE:
      /* Accept all non-symbolic constants.  */
      return false;

    case LABEL_REF:
      /* Labels are OK iff we are non-PIC.  */
      return flag_pic != 0;

    case SYMBOL_REF:
      /* 'Naked' TLS symbol references are never OK,
	 non-TLS symbols are OK iff we are non-PIC.  */
      if (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x))
	return true;
      else
	return flag_pic != 0;

    case CONST:
      return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0));
    case PLUS:
    case MINUS:
      return sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 0))
         || sparc_cannot_force_const_mem (XEXP (x, 1));
    case UNSPEC:
      return true;
    default:
      abort ();
    }
}
\f
/* The table we use to reference PIC data.  */
static GTY(()) rtx global_offset_table;

/* The function we use to get at it.  */
static GTY(()) rtx get_pc_symbol;
static char get_pc_symbol_name[256];

/* Ensure that we are not using patterns that are not OK with PIC.  */

int
check_pic (int i)
{
  switch (flag_pic)
    {
    case 1:
      if (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == SYMBOL_REF
	  || (GET_CODE (recog_data.operand[i]) == CONST
	      && ! (GET_CODE (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0)) == MINUS
		    && (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 0)
			== global_offset_table)
		    && (GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (recog_data.operand[i], 0), 1))
			== CONST))))
	abort ();
    case 2:
    default:
      return 1;
    }
}

/* Return true if X is an address which needs a temporary register when 
   reloaded while generating PIC code.  */

int
pic_address_needs_scratch (rtx x)
{
  /* An address which is a symbolic plus a non SMALL_INT needs a temp reg.  */
  if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
      && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0)) == SYMBOL_REF
      && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)) == CONST_INT
      && ! SMALL_INT (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 1)))
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant.  We already know this
   satisfies CONSTANT_P.  */

bool
legitimate_constant_p (rtx x)
{
  rtx inner;

  switch (GET_CODE (x))
    {
    case SYMBOL_REF:
      /* TLS symbols are not constant.  */
      if (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x))
	return false;
      break;

    case CONST:
      inner = XEXP (x, 0);

      /* Offsets of TLS symbols are never valid.
	 Discourage CSE from creating them.  */
      if (GET_CODE (inner) == PLUS
	  && tls_symbolic_operand (XEXP (inner, 0)))
	return false;
      break;

    case CONST_DOUBLE:
      if (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode)
        return true;

      /* Floating point constants are generally not ok.
	 The only exception is 0.0 in VIS.  */
      if (TARGET_VIS
	  && (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode
	      || GET_MODE (x) == DFmode
	      || GET_MODE (x) == TFmode)
	  && fp_zero_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
	return true;

      return false;

    default:
      break;
    }

  return true;
}

/* Determine if a given RTX is a valid constant address.  */

bool
constant_address_p (rtx x)
{
  switch (GET_CODE (x))
    {
    case LABEL_REF:
    case CONST_INT:
    case HIGH:
      return true;

    case CONST:
      if (flag_pic && pic_address_needs_scratch (x))
	return false;
      return legitimate_constant_p (x);

    case SYMBOL_REF:
      return !flag_pic && legitimate_constant_p (x);

    default:
      return false;
    }
}

/* Nonzero if the constant value X is a legitimate general operand
   when generating PIC code.  It is given that flag_pic is on and
   that X satisfies CONSTANT_P or is a CONST_DOUBLE.  */

bool
legitimate_pic_operand_p (rtx x)
{
  if (pic_address_needs_scratch (x))
    return false;
  if (tls_symbolic_operand (x)
      || (GET_CODE (x) == CONST
	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
	  && tls_symbolic_operand (XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0))))
    return false;
  return true;
}

/* Return nonzero if ADDR is a valid memory address.
   STRICT specifies whether strict register checking applies.  */
   
int
legitimate_address_p (enum machine_mode mode, rtx addr, int strict)
{
  rtx rs1 = NULL, rs2 = NULL, imm1 = NULL, imm2;

  if (REG_P (addr) || GET_CODE (addr) == SUBREG)
    rs1 = addr;
  else if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
    {
      rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0);
      rs2 = XEXP (addr, 1);

      /* Canonicalize.  REG comes first, if there are no regs,
	 LO_SUM comes first.  */
      if (!REG_P (rs1)
	  && GET_CODE (rs1) != SUBREG
	  && (REG_P (rs2)
	      || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG
	      || (GET_CODE (rs2) == LO_SUM && GET_CODE (rs1) != LO_SUM)))
	{
	  rs1 = XEXP (addr, 1);
	  rs2 = XEXP (addr, 0);
	}

      if ((flag_pic == 1
	   && rs1 == pic_offset_table_rtx
	   && !REG_P (rs2)
	   && GET_CODE (rs2) != SUBREG
	   && GET_CODE (rs2) != LO_SUM
	   && GET_CODE (rs2) != MEM
	   && !tls_symbolic_operand (rs2)
	   && (! symbolic_operand (rs2, VOIDmode) || mode == Pmode)
	   && (GET_CODE (rs2) != CONST_INT || SMALL_INT (rs2)))
	  || ((REG_P (rs1)
	       || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
	      && RTX_OK_FOR_OFFSET_P (rs2)))
	{
	  imm1 = rs2;
	  rs2 = NULL;
	}
      else if ((REG_P (rs1) || GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
	       && (REG_P (rs2) || GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG))
	{
	  /* We prohibit REG + REG for TFmode when there are no instructions
	     which accept REG+REG instructions.  We do this because REG+REG
	     is not an offsetable address.  If we get the situation in reload
	     where source and destination of a movtf pattern are both MEMs with
	     REG+REG address, then only one of them gets converted to an
	     offsetable address.  */
	  if (mode == TFmode
	      && !(TARGET_FPU && TARGET_ARCH64 && TARGET_V9
		   && TARGET_HARD_QUAD))
	    return 0;

	  /* We prohibit REG + REG on ARCH32 if not optimizing for
	     DFmode/DImode because then mem_min_alignment is likely to be zero
	     after reload and the  forced split would lack a matching splitter
	     pattern.  */
	  if (TARGET_ARCH32 && !optimize
	      && (mode == DFmode || mode == DImode))
	    return 0;
	}
      else if (USE_AS_OFFSETABLE_LO10
	       && GET_CODE (rs1) == LO_SUM
	       && TARGET_ARCH64
	       && ! TARGET_CM_MEDMID
	       && RTX_OK_FOR_OLO10_P (rs2))
	{
	  imm2 = rs2;
	  rs2 = NULL;
	  imm1 = XEXP (rs1, 1);
	  rs1 = XEXP (rs1, 0);
	  if (! CONSTANT_P (imm1) || tls_symbolic_operand (rs1))
	    return 0;
	}
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
    {
      rs1 = XEXP (addr, 0);
      imm1 = XEXP (addr, 1);

      if (! CONSTANT_P (imm1) || tls_symbolic_operand (rs1))
	return 0;

      /* We can't allow TFmode, because an offset greater than or equal to the
         alignment (8) may cause the LO_SUM to overflow if !v9.  */
      if (mode == TFmode && !TARGET_V9)
	return 0;
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (addr) == CONST_INT && SMALL_INT (addr))
    return 1;
  else
    return 0;

  if (GET_CODE (rs1) == SUBREG)
    rs1 = SUBREG_REG (rs1);
  if (!REG_P (rs1))
    return 0;

  if (rs2)
    {
      if (GET_CODE (rs2) == SUBREG)
	rs2 = SUBREG_REG (rs2);
      if (!REG_P (rs2))
	return 0;
    }

  if (strict)
    {
      if (!REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs1))
	  || (rs2 && !REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (REGNO (rs2))))
	return 0;
    }
  else
    {
      if ((REGNO (rs1) >= 32
	   && REGNO (rs1) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
	   && REGNO (rs1) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
	  || (rs2
	      && (REGNO (rs2) >= 32
		  && REGNO (rs2) != FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
		  && REGNO (rs2) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)))
	return 0;
    }
  return 1;
}

/* Construct the SYMBOL_REF for the tls_get_offset function.  */

static GTY(()) rtx sparc_tls_symbol;
static rtx
sparc_tls_get_addr (void)
{
  if (!sparc_tls_symbol)
    sparc_tls_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "__tls_get_addr");

  return sparc_tls_symbol;
}

static rtx
sparc_tls_got (void)
{
  rtx temp;
  if (flag_pic)
    {
      current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
      return pic_offset_table_rtx;
    }

  if (!global_offset_table)
    global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
  temp = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
  emit_move_insn (temp, global_offset_table);
  return temp;
}


/* ADDR contains a thread-local SYMBOL_REF.  Generate code to compute
   this (thread-local) address.  */

rtx
legitimize_tls_address (rtx addr)
{
  rtx temp1, temp2, temp3, ret, o0, got, insn;

  if (no_new_pseudos)
    abort ();

  if (GET_CODE (addr) == SYMBOL_REF)
    switch (SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (addr))
      {
      case TLS_MODEL_GLOBAL_DYNAMIC:
	start_sequence ();
	temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8);
	got = sparc_tls_got ();
	emit_insn (gen_tgd_hi22 (temp1, addr));
	emit_insn (gen_tgd_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
	if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tgd_add32 (o0, got, temp2, addr));
	    insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
						   addr, const1_rtx));
	  }
	else
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tgd_add64 (o0, got, temp2, addr));
	    insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tgd_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
						   addr, const1_rtx));
	  }
        CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)
	  = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0),
			       CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn));
	insn = get_insns ();
	end_sequence ();
	emit_libcall_block (insn, ret, o0, addr);
	break;

      case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC:
	start_sequence ();
	temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	o0 = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 8);
	got = sparc_tls_got ();
	emit_insn (gen_tldm_hi22 (temp1));
	emit_insn (gen_tldm_lo10 (temp2, temp1));
	if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tldm_add32 (o0, got, temp2));
	    insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call32 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
						    const1_rtx));
	  }
	else
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tldm_add64 (o0, got, temp2));
	    insn = emit_call_insn (gen_tldm_call64 (o0, sparc_tls_get_addr (),
						    const1_rtx));
	  }
        CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn)
	  = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, o0),
			       CALL_INSN_FUNCTION_USAGE (insn));
	insn = get_insns ();
	end_sequence ();
	emit_libcall_block (insn, temp3, o0,
			    gen_rtx_UNSPEC (Pmode, gen_rtvec (1, const0_rtx),
					    UNSPEC_TLSLD_BASE));
	temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	emit_insn (gen_tldo_hix22 (temp1, addr));
	emit_insn (gen_tldo_lox10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
	if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	  emit_insn (gen_tldo_add32 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr));
	else
	  emit_insn (gen_tldo_add64 (ret, temp3, temp2, addr));
	break;

      case TLS_MODEL_INITIAL_EXEC:
	temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (SImode);
	temp3 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	got = sparc_tls_got ();
	emit_insn (gen_tie_hi22 (temp1, addr));
	emit_insn (gen_tie_lo10 (temp2, temp1, addr));
	if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	  emit_insn (gen_tie_ld32 (temp3, got, temp2, addr));
	else
	  emit_insn (gen_tie_ld64 (temp3, got, temp2, addr));
        if (TARGET_SUN_TLS)
	  {
	    ret = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	    if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	      emit_insn (gen_tie_add32 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7),
					temp3, addr));
	    else
	      emit_insn (gen_tie_add64 (ret, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7),
					temp3, addr));
	  }
	else
	  ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp3);
	break;

      case TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_EXEC:
	temp1 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	temp2 = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp32 (temp1, addr));
	    emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp32 (temp2, temp1, addr));
	  }
	else
	  {
	    emit_insn (gen_tle_hix22_sp64 (temp1, addr));
	    emit_insn (gen_tle_lox10_sp64 (temp2, temp1, addr));
	  }
	ret = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 7), temp2);
	break;

      default:
	abort ();
      }

  else
    abort ();  /* for now ... */

  return ret;
}


/* Legitimize PIC addresses.  If the address is already position-independent,
   we return ORIG.  Newly generated position-independent addresses go into a
   reg.  This is REG if nonzero, otherwise we allocate register(s) as
   necessary.  */

rtx
legitimize_pic_address (rtx orig, enum machine_mode mode ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
			rtx reg)
{
  if (GET_CODE (orig) == SYMBOL_REF)
    {
      rtx pic_ref, address;
      rtx insn;

      if (reg == 0)
	{
	  if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
	    abort ();
	  else
	    reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	}

      if (flag_pic == 2)
	{
	  /* If not during reload, allocate another temp reg here for loading
	     in the address, so that these instructions can be optimized
	     properly.  */
	  rtx temp_reg = ((reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
			  ? reg : gen_reg_rtx (Pmode));

	  /* Must put the SYMBOL_REF inside an UNSPEC here so that cse
	     won't get confused into thinking that these two instructions
	     are loading in the true address of the symbol.  If in the
	     future a PIC rtx exists, that should be used instead.  */
	  if (Pmode == SImode)
	    {
	      emit_insn (gen_movsi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
	      emit_insn (gen_movsi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      emit_insn (gen_movdi_high_pic (temp_reg, orig));
	      emit_insn (gen_movdi_lo_sum_pic (temp_reg, temp_reg, orig));
	    }
	  address = temp_reg;
	}
      else
	address = orig;

      pic_ref = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode,
			     gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
					   pic_offset_table_rtx, address));
      current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;
      RTX_UNCHANGING_P (pic_ref) = 1;
      insn = emit_move_insn (reg, pic_ref);
      /* Put a REG_EQUAL note on this insn, so that it can be optimized
	 by loop.  */
      REG_NOTES (insn) = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (REG_EQUAL, orig,
				  REG_NOTES (insn));
      return reg;
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (orig) == CONST)
    {
      rtx base, offset;

      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS
	  && XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0) == pic_offset_table_rtx)
	return orig;

      if (reg == 0)
	{
	  if (reload_in_progress || reload_completed)
	    abort ();
	  else
	    reg = gen_reg_rtx (Pmode);
	}

      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (orig, 0)) == PLUS)
	{
	  base = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 0), Pmode, reg);
	  offset = legitimize_pic_address (XEXP (XEXP (orig, 0), 1), Pmode,
					 base == reg ? 0 : reg);
	}
      else
	abort ();

      if (GET_CODE (offset) == CONST_INT)
	{
	  if (SMALL_INT (offset))
	    return plus_constant (base, INTVAL (offset));
	  else if (! reload_in_progress && ! reload_completed)
	    offset = force_reg (Pmode, offset);
	  else
	    /* If we reach here, then something is seriously wrong.  */
	    abort ();
	}
      return gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, base, offset);
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (orig) == LABEL_REF)
    /* ??? Why do we do this?  */
    /* Now movsi_pic_label_ref uses it, but we ought to be checking that
       the register is live instead, in case it is eliminated.  */
    current_function_uses_pic_offset_table = 1;

  return orig;
}

/* Try machine-dependent ways of modifying an illegitimate address X
   to be legitimate.  If we find one, return the new, valid address.

   OLDX is the address as it was before break_out_memory_refs was called.
   In some cases it is useful to look at this to decide what needs to be done.

   MODE is the mode of the operand pointed to by X.  */

rtx
legitimize_address (rtx x, rtx oldx ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED, enum machine_mode mode)
{
  rtx orig_x = x;

  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == MULT)
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1),
		      force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX));
  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == MULT)
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
		      force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX));
  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS)
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, force_operand (XEXP (x, 0), NULL_RTX),
		      XEXP (x, 1));
  if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 1)) == PLUS)
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
		      force_operand (XEXP (x, 1), NULL_RTX));

  if (x != orig_x && legitimate_address_p (mode, x, FALSE))
    return x;

  if (tls_symbolic_operand (x))
    x = legitimize_tls_address (x);
  else if (flag_pic)
    x = legitimize_pic_address (x, mode, 0);
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 1)))
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0),
		      copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1)));
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == PLUS && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
    x = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, XEXP (x, 1),
		      copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, XEXP (x, 0)));
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF
	   || GET_CODE (x) == CONST
           || GET_CODE (x) == LABEL_REF)
    x = copy_to_suggested_reg (x, NULL_RTX, Pmode);
  return x;
}

/* Emit special PIC prologues.  */

void
load_pic_register (void)
{
  /* Labels to get the PC in the prologue of this function.  */
  int orig_flag_pic = flag_pic;

  if (! flag_pic)
    abort ();

  /* If we haven't emitted the special get_pc helper function, do so now.  */
  if (get_pc_symbol_name[0] == 0)
    {
      int align;

      ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (get_pc_symbol_name, "LGETPC", 0);
      text_section ();

      align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
      if (align > 0)
	ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
      (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "LGETPC", 0);
      fputs ("\tretl\n\tadd\t%o7, %l7, %l7\n", asm_out_file);
    }

  /* Initialize every time through, since we can't easily
     know this to be permanent.  */
  global_offset_table = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, "_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_");
  get_pc_symbol = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, get_pc_symbol_name);
  flag_pic = 0;

  emit_insn (gen_get_pc (pic_offset_table_rtx, global_offset_table,
			 get_pc_symbol));

  flag_pic = orig_flag_pic;

  /* Need to emit this whether or not we obey regdecls,
     since setjmp/longjmp can cause life info to screw up.
     ??? In the case where we don't obey regdecls, this is not sufficient
     since we may not fall out the bottom.  */
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_USE (VOIDmode, pic_offset_table_rtx));
}
\f
/* Return 1 if RTX is a MEM which is known to be aligned to at
   least a DESIRED byte boundary.  */

int
mem_min_alignment (rtx mem, int desired)
{
  rtx addr, base, offset;

  /* If it's not a MEM we can't accept it.  */
  if (GET_CODE (mem) != MEM)
    return 0;

  addr = XEXP (mem, 0);
  base = offset = NULL_RTX;
  if (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS)
    {
      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 0)) == REG)
	{
	  base = XEXP (addr, 0);

	  /* What we are saying here is that if the base
	     REG is aligned properly, the compiler will make
	     sure any REG based index upon it will be so
	     as well.  */
	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT)
	    offset = XEXP (addr, 1);
	  else
	    offset = const0_rtx;
	}
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (addr) == REG)
    {
      base = addr;
      offset = const0_rtx;
    }

  if (base != NULL_RTX)
    {
      int regno = REGNO (base);

      if (regno != HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && regno != STACK_POINTER_REGNUM)
	{
	  /* Check if the compiler has recorded some information
	     about the alignment of the base REG.  If reload has
	     completed, we already matched with proper alignments.
	     If not running global_alloc, reload might give us
	     unaligned pointer to local stack though.  */
	  if (((cfun != 0
		&& REGNO_POINTER_ALIGN (regno) >= desired * BITS_PER_UNIT)
	       || (optimize && reload_completed))
	      && (INTVAL (offset) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
	    return 1;
	}
      else
	{
	  if (((INTVAL (offset) - SPARC_STACK_BIAS) & (desired - 1)) == 0)
	    return 1;
	}
    }
  else if (! TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
	   || CONSTANT_P (addr)
	   || GET_CODE (addr) == LO_SUM)
    {
      /* Anything else we know is properly aligned unless TARGET_UNALIGNED_DOUBLES
	 is true, in which case we can only assume that an access is aligned if
	 it is to a constant address, or the address involves a LO_SUM.  */
      return 1;
    }
  
  /* An obviously unaligned address.  */
  return 0;
}

\f
/* Vectors to keep interesting information about registers where it can easily
   be got.  We used to use the actual mode value as the bit number, but there
   are more than 32 modes now.  Instead we use two tables: one indexed by
   hard register number, and one indexed by mode.  */

/* The purpose of sparc_mode_class is to shrink the range of modes so that
   they all fit (as bit numbers) in a 32 bit word (again).  Each real mode is
   mapped into one sparc_mode_class mode.  */

enum sparc_mode_class {
  S_MODE, D_MODE, T_MODE, O_MODE,
  SF_MODE, DF_MODE, TF_MODE, OF_MODE,
  CC_MODE, CCFP_MODE
};

/* Modes for single-word and smaller quantities.  */
#define S_MODES ((1 << (int) S_MODE) | (1 << (int) SF_MODE))

/* Modes for double-word and smaller quantities.  */
#define D_MODES (S_MODES | (1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << DF_MODE))

/* Modes for quad-word and smaller quantities.  */
#define T_MODES (D_MODES | (1 << (int) T_MODE) | (1 << (int) TF_MODE))

/* Modes for 8-word and smaller quantities.  */
#define O_MODES (T_MODES | (1 << (int) O_MODE) | (1 << (int) OF_MODE))

/* Modes for single-float quantities.  We must allow any single word or
   smaller quantity.  This is because the fix/float conversion instructions
   take integer inputs/outputs from the float registers.  */
#define SF_MODES (S_MODES)

/* Modes for double-float and smaller quantities.  */
#define DF_MODES (S_MODES | D_MODES)

/* Modes for double-float only quantities.  */
#define DF_MODES_NO_S ((1 << (int) D_MODE) | (1 << (int) DF_MODE))

/* Modes for quad-float only quantities.  */
#define TF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) TF_MODE)

/* Modes for quad-float and smaller quantities.  */
#define TF_MODES (DF_MODES | TF_ONLY_MODES)

/* Modes for quad-float and double-float quantities.  */
#define TF_MODES_NO_S (DF_MODES_NO_S | TF_ONLY_MODES)

/* Modes for quad-float pair only quantities.  */
#define OF_ONLY_MODES (1 << (int) OF_MODE)

/* Modes for quad-float pairs and smaller quantities.  */
#define OF_MODES (TF_MODES | OF_ONLY_MODES)

#define OF_MODES_NO_S (TF_MODES_NO_S | OF_ONLY_MODES)

/* Modes for condition codes.  */
#define CC_MODES (1 << (int) CC_MODE)
#define CCFP_MODES (1 << (int) CCFP_MODE)

/* Value is 1 if register/mode pair is acceptable on sparc.
   The funny mixture of D and T modes is because integer operations
   do not specially operate on tetra quantities, so non-quad-aligned
   registers can hold quadword quantities (except %o4 and %i4 because
   they cross fixed registers).  */

/* This points to either the 32 bit or the 64 bit version.  */
const int *hard_regno_mode_classes;

static const int hard_32bit_mode_classes[] = {
  S_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
  T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
  T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,
  T_MODES, S_MODES, T_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES, D_MODES, S_MODES,

  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,

  /* FP regs f32 to f63.  Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
     and none can hold SFmode/SImode values.  */
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,

  /* %fcc[0123] */
  CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,

  /* %icc */
  CC_MODES
};

static const int hard_64bit_mode_classes[] = {
  D_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
  O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
  T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,
  O_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES, T_MODES, D_MODES,

  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,
  OF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES, TF_MODES, SF_MODES, DF_MODES, SF_MODES,

  /* FP regs f32 to f63.  Only the even numbered registers actually exist,
     and none can hold SFmode/SImode values.  */
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,
  OF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0, TF_MODES_NO_S, 0, DF_MODES_NO_S, 0,

  /* %fcc[0123] */
  CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES, CCFP_MODES,

  /* %icc */
  CC_MODES
};

int sparc_mode_class [NUM_MACHINE_MODES];

enum reg_class sparc_regno_reg_class[FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER];

static void
sparc_init_modes (void)
{
  int i;

  for (i = 0; i < NUM_MACHINE_MODES; i++)
    {
      switch (GET_MODE_CLASS (i))
	{
	case MODE_INT:
	case MODE_PARTIAL_INT:
	case MODE_COMPLEX_INT:
	  if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) S_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) D_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) T_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) O_MODE;
	  else 
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
	  break;
	case MODE_FLOAT:
	case MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT:
	  if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) <= 4)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) SF_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 8)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) DF_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 16)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) TF_MODE;
	  else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (i) == 32)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) OF_MODE;
	  else 
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
	  break;
	case MODE_CC:
	default:
	  /* mode_class hasn't been initialized yet for EXTRA_CC_MODES, so
	     we must explicitly check for them here.  */
	  if (i == (int) CCFPmode || i == (int) CCFPEmode)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CCFP_MODE;
	  else if (i == (int) CCmode || i == (int) CC_NOOVmode
		   || i == (int) CCXmode || i == (int) CCX_NOOVmode)
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 1 << (int) CC_MODE;
	  else
	    sparc_mode_class[i] = 0;
	  break;
	}
    }

  if (TARGET_ARCH64)
    hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_64bit_mode_classes;
  else
    hard_regno_mode_classes = hard_32bit_mode_classes;

  /* Initialize the array used by REGNO_REG_CLASS.  */
  for (i = 0; i < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER; i++)
    {
      if (i < 16 && TARGET_V8PLUS)
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = I64_REGS;
      else if (i < 32 || i == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = GENERAL_REGS;
      else if (i < 64)
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FP_REGS;
      else if (i < 96)
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = EXTRA_FP_REGS;
      else if (i < 100)
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = FPCC_REGS;
      else
	sparc_regno_reg_class[i] = NO_REGS;
    }
}
\f
/* Save non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.
   N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far.  This applies even to
   v9 int regs as it simplifies the code.  */

static int
save_regs (FILE *file, int low, int high, const char *base,
	   int offset, int n_regs, int real_offset)
{
  int i;

  if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
    {
      for (i = low; i < high; i++)
	{
	  if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tstx\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
		       reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
	      if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
	      n_regs += 2;
	    }
	}
    }
  else
    {
      for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
	{
	  if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	    {
	      if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tstd\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
		  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		    {
		      char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
		      dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
		      dwarf2out_reg_save (l, i+1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
		    }
		  n_regs += 2;
		}
	      else
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   reg_names[i], base, offset + 4 * n_regs);
		  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		    dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i, real_offset + 4 * n_regs);
		  n_regs += 2;
		}
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   reg_names[i+1], base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
		  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		    dwarf2out_reg_save ("", i + 1, real_offset + 4 * n_regs + 4);
		  n_regs += 2;
		}
	    }
	}
    }
  return n_regs;
}

/* Restore non call used registers from LOW to HIGH at BASE+OFFSET.

   N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far.  This applies even to
   v9 int regs as it simplifies the code.  */

static int
restore_regs (FILE *file, int low, int high, const char *base,
	      int offset, int n_regs)
{
  int i;

  if (TARGET_ARCH64 && high <= 32)
    {
      for (i = low; i < high; i++)
	{
	  if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	    fprintf (file, "\tldx\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
	      base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
	    n_regs += 2;
	}
    }
  else
    {
      for (i = low; i < high; i += 2)
	{
	  if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	    if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
	      fprintf (file, "\tldd\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
		       base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
	      n_regs += 2;
	    else
	      fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
		       base, offset + 4 * n_regs, reg_names[i]),
	      n_regs += 2;
	  else if (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1])
	    fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
		     base, offset + 4 * n_regs + 4, reg_names[i+1]),
	    n_regs += 2;
	}
    }
  return n_regs;
}

/* Compute the frame size required by the function.  This function is called
   during the reload pass and also by output_function_prologue().  */

int
compute_frame_size (int size, int leaf_function)
{
  int n_regs = 0, i;
  int outgoing_args_size = (current_function_outgoing_args_size
			    + REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (current_function_decl));

  /* N_REGS is the number of 4-byte regs saved thus far.  This applies
     even to v9 int regs to be consistent with save_regs/restore_regs.  */

  if (TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
	if (regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	  n_regs += 2;
    }
  else
    {
      for (i = 0; i < 8; i += 2)
	if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	    || (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
	  n_regs += 2;
    }

  for (i = 32; i < (TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64); i += 2)
    if ((regs_ever_live[i] && ! call_used_regs[i])
	|| (regs_ever_live[i+1] && ! call_used_regs[i+1]))
      n_regs += 2;

  /* Set up values for use in `function_epilogue'.  */
  num_gfregs = n_regs;

  if (leaf_function && n_regs == 0
      && size == 0 && current_function_outgoing_args_size == 0)
    {
      actual_fsize = apparent_fsize = 0;
    }
  else
    {
      /* We subtract STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET, remember it's negative.  */
      apparent_fsize = (size - STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + 7) & -8;
      apparent_fsize += n_regs * 4;
      actual_fsize = apparent_fsize + ((outgoing_args_size + 7) & -8);
    }

  /* Make sure nothing can clobber our register windows.
     If a SAVE must be done, or there is a stack-local variable,
     the register window area must be allocated.
     ??? For v8 we apparently need an additional 8 bytes of reserved space.  */
  if (leaf_function == 0 || size > 0)
    actual_fsize += (16 * UNITS_PER_WORD) + (TARGET_ARCH64 ? 0 : 8);

  return SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (actual_fsize);
}

/* Build a (32 bit) big number in a register.  */
/* ??? We may be able to use the set macro here too.  */

static void
build_big_number (FILE *file, int num, const char *reg)
{
  if (num >= 0 || ! TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n", num, reg);
      if ((num & 0x3ff) != 0)
	fprintf (file, "\tor\t%s, %%lo(%d), %s\n", reg, num, reg);
    }
  else /* num < 0 && TARGET_ARCH64 */
    {
      /* Sethi does not sign extend, so we must use a little trickery
	 to use it for negative numbers.  Invert the constant before
	 loading it in, then use xor immediate to invert the loaded bits
	 (along with the upper 32 bits) to the desired constant.  This
	 works because the sethi and immediate fields overlap.  */
      int asize = num;
      int inv = ~asize;
      int low = -0x400 + (asize & 0x3FF);
	  
      fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %s\n\txor\t%s, %d, %s\n",
	       inv, reg, reg, low, reg);
    }
}

/* Output any necessary .register pseudo-ops.  */
void
sparc_output_scratch_registers (FILE *file ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
#ifdef HAVE_AS_REGISTER_PSEUDO_OP
  int i;

  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    return;

  /* Check if %g[2367] were used without
     .register being printed for them already.  */
  for (i = 2; i < 8; i++)
    {
      if (regs_ever_live [i]
	  && ! sparc_hard_reg_printed [i])
	{
	  sparc_hard_reg_printed [i] = 1;
	  fprintf (file, "\t.register\t%%g%d, #scratch\n", i);
	}
      if (i == 3) i = 5;
    }
#endif
}

/* This function generates the assembly code for function entry.
   FILE is a stdio stream to output the code to.
   SIZE is an int: how many units of temporary storage to allocate.
   Refer to the array `regs_ever_live' to determine which registers
   to save; `regs_ever_live[I]' is nonzero if register number I
   is ever used in the function.  This macro is responsible for
   knowing which registers should not be saved even if used.  */

/* On SPARC, move-double insns between fpu and cpu need an 8-byte block
   of memory.  If any fpu reg is used in the function, we allocate
   such a block here, at the bottom of the frame, just in case it's needed.

   If this function is a leaf procedure, then we may choose not
   to do a "save" insn.  The decision about whether or not
   to do this is made in regclass.c.  */

static void
sparc_output_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
{
  if (TARGET_FLAT)
    sparc_flat_function_prologue (file, size);
  else
    sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (file, size,
				     current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
}

/* Output code for the function prologue.  */

static void
sparc_nonflat_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size,
				 int leaf_function)
{
  sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);

  /* Need to use actual_fsize, since we are also allocating
     space for our callee (and our own register save area).  */
  actual_fsize = compute_frame_size (size, leaf_function);

  if (leaf_function)
    {
      frame_base_name = "%sp";
      frame_base_offset = actual_fsize + SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
    }
  else
    {
      frame_base_name = "%fp";
      frame_base_offset = SPARC_STACK_BIAS;
    }

  /* This is only for the human reader.  */
  fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);

  if (actual_fsize == 0)
    /* do nothing.  */ ;
  else if (! leaf_function)
    {
      if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
	fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
      else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
	{
	  fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
	  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
	}
      else
	{
	  build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
	  fprintf (file, "\tsave\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
	}
    }
  else /* leaf function */
    {
      if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
	fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize);
      else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
	{
	  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n");
	  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", actual_fsize - 4096);
	}
      else
	{
	  build_big_number (file, -actual_fsize, "%g1");
	  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n");
	}
    }

  if (dwarf2out_do_frame () && actual_fsize)
    {
      char *label = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();

      /* The canonical frame address refers to the top of the frame.  */
      dwarf2out_def_cfa (label, (leaf_function ? STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
				 : HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM),
			 frame_base_offset);

      if (! leaf_function)
	{
	  /* Note the register window save.  This tells the unwinder that
	     it needs to restore the window registers from the previous
	     frame's window save area at 0(cfa).  */
	  dwarf2out_window_save (label);

	  /* The return address (-8) is now in %i7.  */
	  dwarf2out_return_reg (label, 31);
	}
    }

  /* If doing anything with PIC, do it now.  */
  if (! flag_pic)
    fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);

  /* Call saved registers are saved just above the outgoing argument area.  */
  if (num_gfregs)
    {
      int offset, real_offset, n_regs;
      const char *base;

      real_offset = -apparent_fsize;
      offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
      if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096)
	{
	  /* ??? This might be optimized a little as %g1 might already have a
	     value close enough that a single add insn will do.  */
	  /* ??? Although, all of this is probably only a temporary fix
	     because if %g1 can hold a function result, then
	     output_function_epilogue will lose (the result will get
	     clobbered).  */
	  build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
	  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
	  base = "%g1";
	  offset = 0;
	}
      else
	{
	  base = frame_base_name;
	}

      n_regs = save_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0, real_offset);
      save_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs,
		 real_offset);
    }
}

/* Output code to restore any call saved registers.  */

static void
output_restore_regs (FILE *file, int leaf_function ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  int offset, n_regs;
  const char *base;

  offset = -apparent_fsize + frame_base_offset;
  if (offset < -4096 || offset + num_gfregs * 4 > 4096 - 8 /*double*/)
    {
      build_big_number (file, offset, "%g1");
      fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %%g1, %%g1\n", frame_base_name);
      base = "%g1";
      offset = 0;
    }
  else
    {
      base = frame_base_name;
    }

  n_regs = restore_regs (file, 0, 8, base, offset, 0);
  restore_regs (file, 32, TARGET_V9 ? 96 : 64, base, offset, n_regs);
}

/* This function generates the assembly code for function exit,
   on machines that need it.

   The function epilogue should not depend on the current stack pointer!
   It should use the frame pointer only.  This is mandatory because
   of alloca; we also take advantage of it to omit stack adjustments
   before returning.  */

static void
sparc_output_function_epilogue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
{
  if (TARGET_FLAT)
    sparc_flat_function_epilogue (file, size);
  else
    sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (file, size,
				     current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs);
}

/* Output code for the function epilogue.  */

static void
sparc_nonflat_function_epilogue (FILE *file,
				 HOST_WIDE_INT size ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
				 int leaf_function)
{
  const char *ret;

  if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list == 0)
    {
      /* If code does not drop into the epilogue, we need
	 do nothing except output pending case vectors.

	 We have to still output a dummy nop for the sake of
	 sane backtraces.  Otherwise, if the last two instructions
	 of a function were call foo; dslot; this can make the return
	 PC of foo (ie. address of call instruction plus 8) point to
	 the first instruction in the next function.  */
      rtx insn, last_real_insn;

      insn = get_last_insn ();

      last_real_insn = prev_real_insn (insn);
      if (last_real_insn
	  && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == INSN
	  && GET_CODE (PATTERN (last_real_insn)) == SEQUENCE)
	last_real_insn = XVECEXP (PATTERN (last_real_insn), 0, 0);

      if (last_real_insn && GET_CODE (last_real_insn) == CALL_INSN)
	fputs("\tnop\n", file);

      if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
	      insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
      if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
	      goto output_vectors;
    }

  if (num_gfregs)
    output_restore_regs (file, leaf_function);

  /* Work out how to skip the caller's unimp instruction if required.  */
  if (leaf_function)
    ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%o7+12" : "retl");
  else
    ret = (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P ? "jmp\t%i7+12" : "ret");

  if (! leaf_function)
    {
      if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
	{
	  if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
	    abort ();
	  if (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
	    abort ();

	  fputs ("\trestore\n\tretl\n\tadd\t%sp, %g1, %sp\n", file);
	}
      /* If we wound up with things in our delay slot, flush them here.  */
      else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
	{
	  rtx delay = PATTERN (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0));

	  if (TARGET_V9 && ! epilogue_renumber (&delay, 1))
	    {
	      epilogue_renumber (&delay, 0);
	      fputs (SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P
		     ? "\treturn\t%i7+12\n"
		     : "\treturn\t%i7+8\n", file);
	      final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
			       file, 1, 0, 0);
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      rtx insn, src;

	      if (GET_CODE (delay) != SET)
		abort();

	      src = SET_SRC (delay);
	      if (GET_CODE (src) == ASHIFT)
		{
		  if (XEXP (src, 1) != const1_rtx)
		    abort();
		  SET_SRC (delay)
		    = gen_rtx_PLUS (GET_MODE (src), XEXP (src, 0),
				    XEXP (src, 0));
		}

	      insn = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (VOIDmode,
				       gen_rtvec (2, delay,
						  gen_rtx_RETURN (VOIDmode)));
	      insn = emit_jump_insn (insn);

	      sparc_emitting_epilogue = true;
	      final_scan_insn (insn, file, 1, 0, 1);
	      sparc_emitting_epilogue = false;
	    }
	}
      else if (TARGET_V9 && ! SKIP_CALLERS_UNIMP_P)
	fputs ("\treturn\t%i7+8\n\tnop\n", file);
      else
	fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\trestore\n", ret);
    }
  /* All of the following cases are for leaf functions.  */
  else if (current_function_calls_eh_return)
    abort ();
  else if (current_function_epilogue_delay_list)
    {
      /* eligible_for_epilogue_delay_slot ensures that if this is a
	 leaf function, then we will only have insn in the delay slot
	 if the frame size is zero, thus no adjust for the stack is
	 needed here.  */
      if (actual_fsize != 0)
	abort ();
      fprintf (file, "\t%s\n", ret);
      final_scan_insn (XEXP (current_function_epilogue_delay_list, 0),
		       file, 1, 0, 1);
    }
  /* Output 'nop' instead of 'sub %sp,-0,%sp' when no frame, so as to
	 avoid generating confusing assembly language output.  */
  else if (actual_fsize == 0)
    fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tnop\n", ret);
  else if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
    fprintf (file, "\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", ret, actual_fsize);
  else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
    fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -4096, %%sp\n\t%s\n\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n",
	     ret, actual_fsize - 4096);
  else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
    fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
	     actual_fsize, ret);
  else		 
    fprintf (file, "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n\t%s\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
	     actual_fsize, actual_fsize, ret);

 output_vectors:
  sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
}

/* Output a sibling call.  */

const char *
output_sibcall (rtx insn, rtx call_operand)
{
  int leaf_regs = current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs;
  rtx operands[3];
  int delay_slot = dbr_sequence_length () > 0;

  if (num_gfregs)
    {
      /* Call to restore global regs might clobber
	 the delay slot. Instead of checking for this
	 output the delay slot now.  */
      if (delay_slot)
	{
	  rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);

	  if (! delay)
	    abort ();

	  final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
	  PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
	  INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
	  delay_slot = 0;
	}
      output_restore_regs (asm_out_file, leaf_regs);
    }

  operands[0] = call_operand;

  if (leaf_regs)
    {
#ifdef HAVE_AS_RELAX_OPTION
      /* If as and ld are relaxing tail call insns into branch always,
	 use or %o7,%g0,X; call Y; or X,%g0,%o7 always, so that it can
	 be optimized.  With sethi/jmpl as nor ld has no easy way how to
	 find out if somebody does not branch between the sethi and jmpl.  */
      int spare_slot = 0;
#else
      int spare_slot = ((TARGET_ARCH32 || TARGET_CM_MEDLOW) && ! flag_pic);
#endif
      int size = 0;

      if ((actual_fsize || ! spare_slot) && delay_slot)
	{
	  rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn);

	  if (! delay)
	    abort ();

	  final_scan_insn (delay, asm_out_file, 1, 0, 1);
	  PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
	  INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
	  delay_slot = 0;
	}
      if (actual_fsize)
	{
	  if (actual_fsize <= 4096)
	    size = actual_fsize;
	  else if (actual_fsize <= 8192)
	    {
	      fputs ("\tsub\t%sp, -4096, %sp\n", asm_out_file);
	      size = actual_fsize - 4096;
	    }
	  else if ((actual_fsize & 0x3ff) == 0)
	    fprintf (asm_out_file,
		     "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n",
		     actual_fsize);
	  else
	    {
	      fprintf (asm_out_file,
		       "\tsethi\t%%hi(%d), %%g1\n\tor\t%%g1, %%lo(%d), %%g1\n",
		       actual_fsize, actual_fsize);
	      fputs ("\tadd\t%%sp, %%g1, %%sp\n", asm_out_file);
	    }
	}
      if (spare_slot)
	{
	  output_asm_insn ("sethi\t%%hi(%a0), %%g1", operands);
	  output_asm_insn ("jmpl\t%%g1 + %%lo(%a0), %%g0", operands);
	  if (size)
	    fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t sub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
	  else if (! delay_slot)
	    fputs ("\t nop\n", asm_out_file);
	}
      else
	{
	  if (size)
	    fprintf (asm_out_file, "\tsub\t%%sp, -%d, %%sp\n", size);
	  /* Use or with rs2 %%g0 instead of mov, so that as/ld can optimize
	     it into branch if possible.  */
	  output_asm_insn ("or\t%%o7, %%g0, %%g1", operands);
	  output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
	  output_asm_insn (" or\t%%g1, %%g0, %%o7", operands);
	}
      return "";
    }

  output_asm_insn ("call\t%a0, 0", operands);
  if (delay_slot)
    {
      rtx delay = NEXT_INSN (insn), pat;

      if (! delay)
	abort ();

      pat = PATTERN (delay);
      if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
	abort ();

      operands[0] = SET_DEST (pat);
      pat = SET_SRC (pat);
      switch (GET_CODE (pat))
	{
	case PLUS:
	  operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
	  operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
	  output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %2, %Y0", operands);
	  break;
	case LO_SUM:
	  operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
	  operands[2] = XEXP (pat, 1);
	  output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %%lo(%a2), %Y0", operands);
	  break;
	case ASHIFT:
	  operands[1] = XEXP (pat, 0);
	  output_asm_insn (" restore %r1, %r1, %Y0", operands);
	  break;
	default:
	  operands[1] = pat;
	  output_asm_insn (" restore %%g0, %1, %Y0", operands);
	  break;
	}
      PATTERN (delay) = gen_blockage ();
      INSN_CODE (delay) = -1;
    }
  else
    fputs ("\t restore\n", asm_out_file);
  return "";
}
\f
/* Functions for handling argument passing.

   For v8 the first six args are normally in registers and the rest are
   pushed.  Any arg that starts within the first 6 words is at least
   partially passed in a register unless its data type forbids.

   For v9, the argument registers are laid out as an array of 16 elements
   and arguments are added sequentially.  The first 6 int args and up to the
   first 16 fp args (depending on size) are passed in regs.

   Slot    Stack   Integral   Float   Float in structure   Double   Long Double
   ----    -----   --------   -----   ------------------   ------   -----------
    15   [SP+248]              %f31       %f30,%f31         %d30
    14   [SP+240]              %f29       %f28,%f29         %d28       %q28
    13   [SP+232]              %f27       %f26,%f27         %d26
    12   [SP+224]              %f25       %f24,%f25         %d24       %q24
    11   [SP+216]              %f23       %f22,%f23         %d22
    10   [SP+208]              %f21       %f20,%f21         %d20       %q20
     9   [SP+200]              %f19       %f18,%f19         %d18
     8   [SP+192]              %f17       %f16,%f17         %d16       %q16
     7   [SP+184]              %f15       %f14,%f15         %d14
     6   [SP+176]              %f13       %f12,%f13         %d12       %q12
     5   [SP+168]     %o5      %f11       %f10,%f11         %d10
     4   [SP+160]     %o4       %f9        %f8,%f9           %d8        %q8
     3   [SP+152]     %o3       %f7        %f6,%f7           %d6
     2   [SP+144]     %o2       %f5        %f4,%f5           %d4        %q4
     1   [SP+136]     %o1       %f3        %f2,%f3           %d2
     0   [SP+128]     %o0       %f1        %f0,%f1           %d0        %q0

   Here SP = %sp if -mno-stack-bias or %sp+stack_bias otherwise.

   Integral arguments are always passed as 64 bit quantities appropriately
   extended.

   Passing of floating point values is handled as follows.
   If a prototype is in scope:
     If the value is in a named argument (i.e. not a stdarg function or a
     value not part of the `...') then the value is passed in the appropriate
     fp reg.
     If the value is part of the `...' and is passed in one of the first 6
     slots then the value is passed in the appropriate int reg.
     If the value is part of the `...' and is not passed in one of the first 6
     slots then the value is passed in memory.
   If a prototype is not in scope:
     If the value is one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in the
     appropriate integer reg and the appropriate fp reg.
     If the value is not one of the first 6 arguments the value is passed in
     the appropriate fp reg and in memory.
   */

/* Maximum number of int regs for args.  */
#define SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX 6
/* Maximum number of fp regs for args.  */
#define SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX 16

#define ROUND_ADVANCE(SIZE) (((SIZE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD)

/* Handle the INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS macro.
   Initialize a variable CUM of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS
   for a call to a function whose data type is FNTYPE.
   For a library call, FNTYPE is 0.  */

void
init_cumulative_args (struct sparc_args *cum, tree fntype,
		      rtx libname ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
		      tree fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  cum->words = 0;
  cum->prototype_p = fntype && TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype);
  cum->libcall_p = fntype == 0;
}

/* Compute the slot number to pass an argument in.
   Returns the slot number or -1 if passing on the stack.

   CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
    the preceding args and about the function being called.
   MODE is the argument's machine mode.
   TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
    This is null for libcalls where that information may
    not be available.
   NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
    (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
   INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG.
   *PREGNO records the register number to use if scalar type.
   *PPADDING records the amount of padding needed in words.  */

static int
function_arg_slotno (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
		     tree type, int named, int incoming_p,
		     int *pregno, int *ppadding)
{
  int regbase = (incoming_p
		 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
		 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
  int slotno = cum->words;
  int regno;

  *ppadding = 0;

  if (type != 0 && TREE_ADDRESSABLE (type))
    return -1;
  if (TARGET_ARCH32
      && type != 0 && mode == BLKmode
      && TYPE_ALIGN (type) % PARM_BOUNDARY != 0)
    return -1;

  switch (mode)
    {
    case VOIDmode :
      /* MODE is VOIDmode when generating the actual call.
	 See emit_call_1.  */
      return -1;

    case QImode : case CQImode :
    case HImode : case CHImode :
    case SImode : case CSImode :
    case DImode : case CDImode :
    case TImode : case CTImode :
      if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
	return -1;
      regno = regbase + slotno;
      break;

    case SFmode : case SCmode :
    case DFmode : case DCmode :
    case TFmode : case TCmode :
      if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	{
	  if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
	    return -1;
	  regno = regbase + slotno;
	}
      else
	{
	  if ((mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode)
	      && (slotno & 1) != 0)
	    slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
	  if (TARGET_FPU && named)
	    {
	      if (slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
		return -1;
	      regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + slotno * 2;
	      if (mode == SFmode)
		regno++;
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
		return -1;
	      regno = regbase + slotno;
	    }
	}
      break;

    case BLKmode :
      /* For sparc64, objects requiring 16 byte alignment get it.  */
      if (TARGET_ARCH64)
	{
	  if (type && TYPE_ALIGN (type) == 128 && (slotno & 1) != 0)
	    slotno++, *ppadding = 1;
	}

      if (TARGET_ARCH32
	  || (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE))
	{
	  if (slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
	    return -1;
	  regno = regbase + slotno;
	}
      else
	{
	  tree field;
	  int intregs_p = 0, fpregs_p = 0;
	  /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed
	     structures are passed.  These are defined to be passed
	     in int regs if possible, otherwise memory.  */
	  int packed_p = 0;

	  /* First see what kinds of registers we need.  */
	  for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
	    {
	      if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
		{
		  if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
		      && TARGET_FPU)
		    fpregs_p = 1;
		  else
		    intregs_p = 1;
		  if (DECL_PACKED (field))
		    packed_p = 1;
		}
	    }
	  if (packed_p || !named)
	    fpregs_p = 0, intregs_p = 1;

	  /* If all arg slots are filled, then must pass on stack.  */
	  if (fpregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
	    return -1;
	  /* If there are only int args and all int arg slots are filled,
	     then must pass on stack.  */
	  if (!fpregs_p && intregs_p && slotno >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
	    return -1;
	  /* Note that even if all int arg slots are filled, fp members may
	     still be passed in regs if such regs are available.
	     *PREGNO isn't set because there may be more than one, it's up
	     to the caller to compute them.  */
	  return slotno;
	}
      break;

    default :
      abort ();
    }

  *pregno = regno;
  return slotno;
}

/* Handle recursive register counting for structure field layout.  */

struct function_arg_record_value_parms
{
  rtx ret;		/* return expression being built.  */
  int slotno;		/* slot number of the argument.  */
  int named;		/* whether the argument is named.  */
  int regbase;		/* regno of the base register.  */
  int stack;		/* 1 if part of the argument is on the stack.  */
  int intoffset;	/* offset of the pending integer field.  */
  unsigned int nregs;	/* number of words passed in registers.  */
};

static void function_arg_record_value_3
 (HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *);
static void function_arg_record_value_2
 (tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *);
static void function_arg_record_value_1
 (tree, HOST_WIDE_INT, struct function_arg_record_value_parms *);
static rtx function_arg_record_value (tree, enum machine_mode, int, int, int);

/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value.  Traverse the structure
   recursively and determine how many registers will be required.  */

static void
function_arg_record_value_1 (tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos,
			     struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms)
{
  tree field;

  /* The ABI obviously doesn't specify how packed structures are
     passed.  These are defined to be passed in int regs if possible,
     otherwise memory.  */
  int packed_p = 0;

  /* We need to compute how many registers are needed so we can
     allocate the PARALLEL but before we can do that we need to know
     whether there are any packed fields.  If there are, int regs are
     used regardless of whether there are fp values present.  */
  for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
    {
      if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
	{
	  packed_p = 1;
	  break;
	}
    }

  /* Compute how many registers we need.  */
  for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
    {
      if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
	{
	  HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;

	  if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
	      && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
	    bitpos += int_bit_position (field);

	  /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset.  */

	  if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
	    function_arg_record_value_1 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
	  else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
		    || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
			&& (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
			    == REAL_TYPE)))
	           && TARGET_FPU
	           && ! packed_p
	           && parms->named)
	    {
	      if (parms->intoffset != -1)
		{
		  int intslots, this_slotno;

		  intslots = (bitpos - parms->intoffset + BITS_PER_WORD - 1)
		    / BITS_PER_WORD;
		  this_slotno = parms->slotno + parms->intoffset
		    / BITS_PER_WORD;

		  if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
		    {
		      intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
		      /* We need to pass this field on the stack.  */
		      parms->stack = 1;
		    }

		  parms->nregs += intslots;
		  parms->intoffset = -1;
		}

	      /* There's no need to check this_slotno < SPARC_FP_ARG MAX.
		 If it wasn't true we wouldn't be here.  */
	      parms->nregs += 1;
	      if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
		parms->nregs += 1;
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      if (parms->intoffset == -1)
		parms->intoffset = bitpos;
	    }
	}
    }
}

/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value.  Assign the bits of the
   structure between parms->intoffset and bitpos to integer registers.  */

static void 
function_arg_record_value_3 (HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos,
			     struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms)
{
  enum machine_mode mode;
  unsigned int regno;
  unsigned int startbit, endbit;
  int this_slotno, intslots, intoffset;
  rtx reg;

  if (parms->intoffset == -1)
    return;

  intoffset = parms->intoffset;
  parms->intoffset = -1;

  startbit = intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
  endbit = (bitpos + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
  intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
  this_slotno = parms->slotno + intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;

  intslots = MIN (intslots, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
  if (intslots <= 0)
    return;

  /* If this is the trailing part of a word, only load that much into
     the register.  Otherwise load the whole register.  Note that in
     the latter case we may pick up unwanted bits.  It's not a problem
     at the moment but may wish to revisit.  */

  if (intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD != 0)
    mode = mode_for_size (BITS_PER_WORD - intoffset % BITS_PER_WORD,
			  MODE_INT, 0);
  else
    mode = word_mode;

  intoffset /= BITS_PER_UNIT;
  do
    {
      regno = parms->regbase + this_slotno;
      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
      XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
	= gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, GEN_INT (intoffset));

      this_slotno += 1;
      intoffset = (intoffset | (UNITS_PER_WORD-1)) + 1;
      parms->nregs += 1;
      intslots -= 1;
    }
  while (intslots > 0);
}

/* A subroutine of function_arg_record_value.  Traverse the structure
   recursively and assign bits to floating point registers.  Track which
   bits in between need integer registers; invoke function_arg_record_value_3
   to make that happen.  */

static void
function_arg_record_value_2 (tree type, HOST_WIDE_INT startbitpos,
			     struct function_arg_record_value_parms *parms)
{
  tree field;
  int packed_p = 0;

  for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
    {
      if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL && DECL_PACKED (field))
	{
	  packed_p = 1;
	  break;
	}
    }

  for (field = TYPE_FIELDS (type); field; field = TREE_CHAIN (field))
    {
      if (TREE_CODE (field) == FIELD_DECL)
	{
	  HOST_WIDE_INT bitpos = startbitpos;

	  if (DECL_SIZE (field) != 0
	      && host_integerp (bit_position (field), 1))
	    bitpos += int_bit_position (field);

	  /* ??? FIXME: else assume zero offset.  */

	  if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == RECORD_TYPE)
	    function_arg_record_value_2 (TREE_TYPE (field), bitpos, parms);
	  else if ((TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == REAL_TYPE
		    || (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE
			&& (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (field)))
			    == REAL_TYPE)))
	           && TARGET_FPU
	           && ! packed_p
	           && parms->named)
	    {
	      int this_slotno = parms->slotno + bitpos / BITS_PER_WORD;
	      int regno;
	      enum machine_mode mode = DECL_MODE (field);
	      rtx reg;

	      function_arg_record_value_3 (bitpos, parms);
	      regno = SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST + this_slotno * 2
		      + ((mode == SFmode || mode == SCmode)
			 && (bitpos & 32) != 0);
	      switch (mode)
		{
		case SCmode: mode = SFmode; break;
		case DCmode: mode = DFmode; break;
		case TCmode: mode = TFmode; break;
		default: break;
		}
	      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
	      XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
		= gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
			   GEN_INT (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT));
	      parms->nregs += 1;
	      if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (field)) == COMPLEX_TYPE)
		{
		  regno += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / 4;
	  	  reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
		  XVECEXP (parms->ret, 0, parms->stack + parms->nregs)
		    = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg,
			GEN_INT ((bitpos + GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode))
				 / BITS_PER_UNIT));
		  parms->nregs += 1;
		}
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      if (parms->intoffset == -1)
		parms->intoffset = bitpos;
	    }
	}
    }
}

/* Used by function_arg and function_value to implement the complex
   conventions of the 64-bit ABI for passing and returning structures.
   Return an expression valid as a return value for the two macros
   FUNCTION_ARG and FUNCTION_VALUE.

   TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
    This is null for libcalls where that information may
    not be available.
   MODE is the argument's machine mode.
   SLOTNO is the index number of the argument's slot in the parameter array.
   NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
    (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
   REGBASE is the regno of the base register for the parameter array.  */
   
static rtx
function_arg_record_value (tree type, enum machine_mode mode,
			   int slotno, int named, int regbase)
{
  HOST_WIDE_INT typesize = int_size_in_bytes (type);
  struct function_arg_record_value_parms parms;
  unsigned int nregs;

  parms.ret = NULL_RTX;
  parms.slotno = slotno;
  parms.named = named;
  parms.regbase = regbase;
  parms.stack = 0;

  /* Compute how many registers we need.  */
  parms.nregs = 0;
  parms.intoffset = 0;
  function_arg_record_value_1 (type, 0, &parms);

  if (parms.intoffset != -1)
    {
      unsigned int startbit, endbit;
      int intslots, this_slotno;

      startbit = parms.intoffset & -BITS_PER_WORD;
      endbit = (typesize*BITS_PER_UNIT + BITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -BITS_PER_WORD;
      intslots = (endbit - startbit) / BITS_PER_WORD;
      this_slotno = slotno + parms.intoffset / BITS_PER_WORD;

      if (intslots > 0 && intslots > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno)
        {
	  intslots = MAX (0, SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - this_slotno);
	  /* We need to pass this field on the stack.  */
	  parms.stack = 1;
        }

      parms.nregs += intslots;
    }
  nregs = parms.nregs;

  /* Allocate the vector and handle some annoying special cases.  */
  if (nregs == 0)
    {
      /* ??? Empty structure has no value?  Duh?  */
      if (typesize <= 0)
	{
	  /* Though there's nothing really to store, return a word register
	     anyway so the rest of gcc doesn't go nuts.  Returning a PARALLEL
	     leads to breakage due to the fact that there are zero bytes to
	     load.  */
	  return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regbase);
	}
      else
	{
	  /* ??? C++ has structures with no fields, and yet a size.  Give up
	     for now and pass everything back in integer registers.  */
	  nregs = (typesize + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
	}
      if (nregs + slotno > SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX)
	nregs = SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - slotno;
    }
  if (nregs == 0)
    abort ();

  parms.ret = gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, rtvec_alloc (parms.stack + nregs));

  /* If at least one field must be passed on the stack, generate
     (parallel [(expr_list (nil) ...) ...]) so that all fields will
     also be passed on the stack.  We can't do much better because the
     semantics of FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS doesn't handle the case
     of structures for which the fields passed exclusively in registers
     are not at the beginning of the structure.  */
  if (parms.stack)
    XVECEXP (parms.ret, 0, 0)
      = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);

  /* Fill in the entries.  */
  parms.nregs = 0;
  parms.intoffset = 0;
  function_arg_record_value_2 (type, 0, &parms);
  function_arg_record_value_3 (typesize * BITS_PER_UNIT, &parms);

  if (parms.nregs != nregs)
    abort ();

  return parms.ret;
}

/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG macro.
   Determine where to put an argument to a function.
   Value is zero to push the argument on the stack,
   or a hard register in which to store the argument.

   CUM is a variable of type CUMULATIVE_ARGS which gives info about
    the preceding args and about the function being called.
   MODE is the argument's machine mode.
   TYPE is the data type of the argument (as a tree).
    This is null for libcalls where that information may
    not be available.
   NAMED is nonzero if this argument is a named parameter
    (otherwise it is an extra parameter matching an ellipsis).
   INCOMING_P is zero for FUNCTION_ARG, nonzero for FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG.  */

rtx
function_arg (const struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
	      tree type, int named, int incoming_p)
{
  int regbase = (incoming_p
		 ? SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST
		 : SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST);
  int slotno, regno, padding;
  rtx reg;

  slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, incoming_p,
				&regno, &padding);

  if (slotno == -1)
    return 0;

  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    {
      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
      return reg;
    }

  /* v9 fp args in reg slots beyond the int reg slots get passed in regs
     but also have the slot allocated for them.
     If no prototype is in scope fp values in register slots get passed
     in two places, either fp regs and int regs or fp regs and memory.  */
  if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_FLOAT
       || GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
      && SPARC_FP_REG_P (regno))
    {
      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
      if (cum->prototype_p || cum->libcall_p)
	{
	  /* "* 2" because fp reg numbers are recorded in 4 byte
	     quantities.  */
#if 0
	  /* ??? This will cause the value to be passed in the fp reg and
	     in the stack.  When a prototype exists we want to pass the
	     value in the reg but reserve space on the stack.  That's an
	     optimization, and is deferred [for a bit].  */
	  if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) >= SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
	    return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode,
			    gen_rtvec (2,
				       gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
						NULL_RTX, const0_rtx),
				       gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode,
						reg, const0_rtx)));
	  else
#else
	  /* ??? It seems that passing back a register even when past
	     the area declared by REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE will allocate
	     space appropriately, and will not copy the data onto the
	     stack, exactly as we desire.

	     This is due to locate_and_pad_parm being called in
	     expand_call whenever reg_parm_stack_space > 0, which
	     while beneficial to our example here, would seem to be
	     in error from what had been intended.  Ho hum...  -- r~ */
#endif
	    return reg;
	}
      else
	{
	  rtx v0, v1;

	  if ((regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) < SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX * 2)
	    {
	      int intreg;

	      /* On incoming, we don't need to know that the value
		 is passed in %f0 and %i0, and it confuses other parts
		 causing needless spillage even on the simplest cases.  */
	      if (incoming_p)
		return reg;

	      intreg = (SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
			+ (regno - SPARC_FP_ARG_FIRST) / 2);

	      v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
	      v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, gen_rtx_REG (mode, intreg),
				      const0_rtx);
	      return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      v0 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, NULL_RTX, const0_rtx);
	      v1 = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, reg, const0_rtx);
	      return gen_rtx_PARALLEL (mode, gen_rtvec (2, v0, v1));
	    }
	}
    }
  else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
    {
      /* Structures up to 16 bytes in size are passed in arg slots on the
	 stack and are promoted to registers where possible.  */

      if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16)
	abort (); /* shouldn't get here */

      return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, slotno, named, regbase);
    }
  else if (type && TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
    {
      enum machine_mode mode;
      int bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);

      if (bytes > 16)
	abort ();

      mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
    }
  else
    {
      /* Scalar or complex int.  */
      reg = gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
    }

  return reg;
}

/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS macro.
   For an arg passed partly in registers and partly in memory,
   this is the number of registers used.
   For args passed entirely in registers or entirely in memory, zero.

   Any arg that starts in the first 6 regs but won't entirely fit in them
   needs partial registers on v8.  On v9, structures with integer
   values in arg slots 5,6 will be passed in %o5 and SP+176, and complex fp
   values that begin in the last fp reg [where "last fp reg" varies with the
   mode] will be split between that reg and memory.  */

int
function_arg_partial_nregs (const struct sparc_args *cum,
			    enum machine_mode mode, tree type, int named)
{
  int slotno, regno, padding;

  /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter.  */
  slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);

  if (slotno == -1)
    return 0;

  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    {
      if ((slotno + (mode == BLKmode
		     ? ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type))
		     : ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))))
	  > NPARM_REGS (SImode))
	return NPARM_REGS (SImode) - slotno;
      return 0;
    }
  else
    {
      if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
	{
	  int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
	  int align = TYPE_ALIGN (type);

	  if (align == 16)
	    slotno += slotno & 1;
	  if (size > 8 && size <= 16
	      && slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
	    return 1;
	}
      else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT
	       || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT
		   && ! (TARGET_FPU && named)))
	{
	  if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
	    {
	      slotno += slotno & 1;
	      if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 2)
		return 1;
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      if (slotno == SPARC_INT_ARG_MAX - 1)
		return 1;
	    }
	}
      else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
	{
	  if (GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (mode) == 128)
	    slotno += slotno & 1;
	  if ((slotno + GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD)
	      > SPARC_FP_ARG_MAX)
	    return 1;
	}
      return 0;
    }
}

/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE macro.
   !v9: The SPARC ABI stipulates passing struct arguments (of any size) and
   quad-precision floats by invisible reference.
   v9: Aggregates greater than 16 bytes are passed by reference.
   For Pascal, also pass arrays by reference.  */

int
function_arg_pass_by_reference (const struct sparc_args *cum ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
				enum machine_mode mode, tree type,
				int named ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    {
      return ((type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
	      || mode == TFmode || mode == TCmode);
    }
  else
    {
      return ((type && TREE_CODE (type) == ARRAY_TYPE)
	      /* Consider complex values as aggregates, so care for TCmode.  */
	      || GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) > 16
	      || (type
		  && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
		  && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) int_size_in_bytes (type) > 16));
    }
}

/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE macro.
   Update the data in CUM to advance over an argument
   of mode MODE and data type TYPE.
   TYPE is null for libcalls where that information may not be available.  */

void
function_arg_advance (struct sparc_args *cum, enum machine_mode mode,
		      tree type, int named)
{
  int slotno, regno, padding;

  /* We pass 0 for incoming_p here, it doesn't matter.  */
  slotno = function_arg_slotno (cum, mode, type, named, 0, &regno, &padding);

  /* If register required leading padding, add it.  */
  if (slotno != -1)
    cum->words += padding;

  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    {
      cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
		     ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
		     : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
    }
  else
    {
      if (type && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
	{
	  int size = int_size_in_bytes (type);

	  if (size <= 8)
	    ++cum->words;
	  else if (size <= 16)
	    cum->words += 2;
	  else /* passed by reference */
	    ++cum->words;
	}
      else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_INT)
	{
	  cum->words += 2;
	}
      else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_COMPLEX_FLOAT)
	{
	  cum->words += GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
	}
      else
	{
	  cum->words += (mode != BLKmode
			 ? ROUND_ADVANCE (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode))
			 : ROUND_ADVANCE (int_size_in_bytes (type)));
	}
    }
}

/* Handle the FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING macro.
   For the 64 bit ABI structs are always stored left shifted in their
   argument slot.  */

enum direction
function_arg_padding (enum machine_mode mode, tree type)
{
  if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type != 0 && AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
    return upward;

  /* Fall back to the default.  */
  return DEFAULT_FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
}

/* Handle FUNCTION_VALUE, FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE, and LIBCALL_VALUE macros.
   For v9, function return values are subject to the same rules as arguments,
   except that up to 32-bytes may be returned in registers.  */

rtx
function_value (tree type, enum machine_mode mode, int incoming_p)
{
  int regno;
  int regbase = (incoming_p
		 ? SPARC_OUTGOING_INT_ARG_FIRST
		 : SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);

  if (TARGET_ARCH64 && type)
    {
      if (TREE_CODE (type) == RECORD_TYPE)
	{
	  /* Structures up to 32 bytes in size are passed in registers,
	     promoted to fp registers where possible.  */

	  if (int_size_in_bytes (type) > 32)
	    abort (); /* shouldn't get here */

	  return function_arg_record_value (type, mode, 0, 1, regbase);
	}
      else if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
	{
	  /* All other aggregate types are passed in an integer register
	     in a mode corresponding to the size of the type.  */
	  HOST_WIDE_INT bytes = int_size_in_bytes (type);

	  if (bytes > 32)
	    abort ();

	  mode = mode_for_size (bytes * BITS_PER_UNIT, MODE_INT, 0);
	}
    }
    
  if (TARGET_ARCH64
      && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT 
      && GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) < UNITS_PER_WORD
      && type && ! AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
    mode = DImode;

  if (incoming_p)
    regno = BASE_RETURN_VALUE_REG (mode);
  else
    regno = BASE_OUTGOING_VALUE_REG (mode);

  return gen_rtx_REG (mode, regno);
}

/* Do what is necessary for `va_start'.  We look at the current function
   to determine if stdarg or varargs is used and return the address of
   the first unnamed parameter.  */

rtx
sparc_builtin_saveregs (void)
{
  int first_reg = current_function_args_info.words;
  rtx address;
  int regno;

  for (regno = first_reg; regno < NPARM_REGS (word_mode); regno++)
    emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (word_mode,
				 gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
					       frame_pointer_rtx,
					       GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
							+ (UNITS_PER_WORD
							   * regno)))),
		    gen_rtx_REG (word_mode,
				 BASE_INCOMING_ARG_REG (word_mode) + regno));

  address = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode,
			  frame_pointer_rtx,
			  GEN_INT (FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (0)
				   + UNITS_PER_WORD * first_reg));

  return address;
}

/* Implement `va_start' for varargs and stdarg.  */

void
sparc_va_start (tree valist, rtx nextarg)
{
  nextarg = expand_builtin_saveregs ();
  std_expand_builtin_va_start (valist, nextarg);
}

/* Implement `va_arg'.  */

rtx
sparc_va_arg (tree valist, tree type)
{
  HOST_WIDE_INT size, rsize, align;
  tree addr, incr;
  rtx addr_rtx;
  int indirect = 0;

  /* Round up sizeof(type) to a word.  */
  size = int_size_in_bytes (type);
  rsize = (size + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) & -UNITS_PER_WORD;
  align = 0;

  if (TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      if (TYPE_ALIGN (type) >= 2 * (unsigned) BITS_PER_WORD)
	align = 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;

      if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type))
	{
	  if ((unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) size > 16)
	    {
	      indirect = 1;
	      size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
	      align = 0;
	    }
	  /* SPARC v9 ABI states that structures up to 8 bytes in size are
	     given one 8 byte slot.  */
	  else if (size == 0)
	    size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
	  else
	    size = rsize;
	}
    }
  else
    {
      if (AGGREGATE_TYPE_P (type)
	  || TYPE_MODE (type) == TFmode
	  || TYPE_MODE (type) == TCmode)
	{
	  indirect = 1;
	  size = rsize = UNITS_PER_WORD;
	}
    }

  incr = valist;
  if (align)
    {
      incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
			 build_int_2 (align - 1, 0)));
      incr = fold (build (BIT_AND_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
			  build_int_2 (-align, -1)));
    }

  addr = incr = save_expr (incr);
  if (BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN && size < rsize)
    {
      addr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
			  build_int_2 (rsize - size, 0)));
    }
  incr = fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, ptr_type_node, incr,
		      build_int_2 (rsize, 0)));

  incr = build (MODIFY_EXPR, ptr_type_node, valist, incr);
  TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (incr) = 1;
  expand_expr (incr, const0_rtx, VOIDmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);

  addr_rtx = expand_expr (addr, NULL, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);

  /* If the address isn't aligned properly for the type,
     we may need to copy to a temporary.  
     FIXME: This is inefficient.  Usually we can do this
     in registers.  */
  if (align == 0
      && TYPE_ALIGN (type) > BITS_PER_WORD
      && !indirect)
    {
      /* FIXME: We really need to specify that the temporary is live
	 for the whole function because expand_builtin_va_arg wants
	 the alias set to be get_varargs_alias_set (), but in this
	 case the alias set is that for TYPE and if the memory gets
	 reused it will be reused with alias set TYPE.  */
      rtx tmp = assign_temp (type, 0, 1, 0);
      rtx dest_addr;

      addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
      addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (BLKmode, addr_rtx);
      set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
      set_mem_align (addr_rtx, BITS_PER_WORD);
      tmp = shallow_copy_rtx (tmp);
      PUT_MODE (tmp, BLKmode);
      set_mem_alias_set (tmp, 0);
      
      dest_addr = emit_block_move (tmp, addr_rtx, GEN_INT (rsize),
				   BLOCK_OP_NORMAL);
      if (dest_addr != NULL_RTX)
	addr_rtx = dest_addr;
      else
	addr_rtx = XCEXP (tmp, 0, MEM);
    }

  if (indirect)
    {
      addr_rtx = force_reg (Pmode, addr_rtx);
      addr_rtx = gen_rtx_MEM (Pmode, addr_rtx);
      set_mem_alias_set (addr_rtx, get_varargs_alias_set ());
    }

  return addr_rtx;
}
\f
/* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, which is
   the operand number of the label.  OP is the conditional expression.
   XEXP (OP, 0) is assumed to be a condition code register (integer or
   floating point) and its mode specifies what kind of comparison we made.

   REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.

   ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.

   NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop.

   INSN, if set, is the insn.  */

char *
output_cbranch (rtx op, rtx dest, int label, int reversed, int annul,
		int noop, rtx insn)
{
  static char string[50];
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
  rtx cc_reg = XEXP (op, 0);
  enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (cc_reg);
  const char *labelno, *branch;
  int spaces = 8, far;
  char *p;

  /* v9 branches are limited to +-1MB.  If it is too far away,
     change

     bne,pt %xcc, .LC30

     to

     be,pn %xcc, .+12
     nop
     ba .LC30

     and

     fbne,a,pn %fcc2, .LC29

     to

     fbe,pt %fcc2, .+16
     nop
     ba .LC29  */

  far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;
  if (reversed ^ far)
    {
      /* Reversal of FP compares takes care -- an ordered compare
	 becomes an unordered compare and vice versa.  */
      if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
	code = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (code);
      else
	code = reverse_condition (code);
    }

  /* Start by writing the branch condition.  */
  if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
    {
      switch (code)
	{
	case NE:
	  branch = "fbne";
	  break;
	case EQ:
	  branch = "fbe";
	  break;
	case GE:
	  branch = "fbge";
	  break;
	case GT:
	  branch = "fbg";
	  break;
	case LE:
	  branch = "fble";
	  break;
	case LT:
	  branch = "fbl";
	  break;
	case UNORDERED:
	  branch = "fbu";
	  break;
	case ORDERED:
	  branch = "fbo";
	  break;
	case UNGT:
	  branch = "fbug";
	  break;
	case UNLT:
	  branch = "fbul";
	  break;
	case UNEQ:
	  branch = "fbue";
	  break;
	case UNGE:
	  branch = "fbuge";
	  break;
	case UNLE:
	  branch = "fbule";
	  break;
	case LTGT:
	  branch = "fblg";
	  break;

	default:
	  abort ();
	}

      /* ??? !v9: FP branches cannot be preceded by another floating point
	 insn.  Because there is currently no concept of pre-delay slots,
	 we can fix this only by always emitting a nop before a floating
	 point branch.  */

      string[0] = '\0';
      if (! TARGET_V9)
	strcpy (string, "nop\n\t");
      strcat (string, branch);
    }
  else
    {
      switch (code)
	{
	case NE:
	  branch = "bne";
	  break;
	case EQ:
	  branch = "be";
	  break;
	case GE:
	  if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
	    branch = "bpos";
	  else
	    branch = "bge";
	  break;
	case GT:
	  branch = "bg";
	  break;
	case LE:
	  branch = "ble";
	  break;
	case LT:
	  if (mode == CC_NOOVmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
	    branch = "bneg";
	  else
	    branch = "bl";
	  break;
	case GEU:
	  branch = "bgeu";
	  break;
	case GTU:
	  branch = "bgu";
	  break;
	case LEU:
	  branch = "bleu";
	  break;
	case LTU:
	  branch = "blu";
	  break;

	default:
	  abort ();
	}
      strcpy (string, branch);
    }
  spaces -= strlen (branch);
  p = strchr (string, '\0');

  /* Now add the annulling, the label, and a possible noop.  */
  if (annul && ! far)
    {
      strcpy (p, ",a");
      p += 2;
      spaces -= 2;
    }

  if (! TARGET_V9)
    labelno = "";
  else
    {
      rtx note;
      int v8 = 0;

      if (! far && insn && INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
	{
	  int delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
		       - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
	  /* Leave some instructions for "slop".  */
	  if (delta < -260000 || delta >= 260000)
	    v8 = 1;
	}

      if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
	{
	  static char v9_fcc_labelno[] = "%%fccX, ";
	  /* Set the char indicating the number of the fcc reg to use.  */
	  v9_fcc_labelno[5] = REGNO (cc_reg) - SPARC_FIRST_V9_FCC_REG + '0';
	  labelno = v9_fcc_labelno;
	  if (v8)
	    {
	      if (REGNO (cc_reg) == SPARC_FCC_REG)
		labelno = "";
	      else
		abort ();
	    }
	}
      else if (mode == CCXmode || mode == CCX_NOOVmode)
	{
	  labelno = "%%xcc, ";
	  if (v8)
	    abort ();
	}
      else
	{
	  labelno = "%%icc, ";
	  if (v8)
	    labelno = "";
	}

      if (*labelno && insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
	{
	  strcpy (p,
		  ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
		  ? ",pt" : ",pn");
	  p += 3;
	  spaces -= 3;
	}
    }
  if (spaces > 0)
    *p++ = '\t';
  else
    *p++ = ' ';
  strcpy (p, labelno);
  p = strchr (p, '\0');
  if (far)
    {
      strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\tb\t");
      if (annul || noop)
        p[3] = '6';
      p += 13;
    }
  *p++ = '%';
  *p++ = 'l';
  /* Set the char indicating the number of the operand containing the
     label_ref.  */
  *p++ = label + '0';
  *p = '\0';
  if (noop)
    strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");

  return string;
}

/* Emit a library call comparison between floating point X and Y.
   COMPARISON is the rtl operator to compare with (EQ, NE, GT, etc.).
   TARGET_ARCH64 uses _Qp_* functions, which use pointers to TFmode
   values as arguments instead of the TFmode registers themselves,
   that's why we cannot call emit_float_lib_cmp.  */
void
sparc_emit_float_lib_cmp (rtx x, rtx y, enum rtx_code comparison)
{
  const char *qpfunc;
  rtx slot0, slot1, result, tem, tem2;
  enum machine_mode mode;

  switch (comparison)
    {
    case EQ:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_feq" : "_Q_feq";
      break;

    case NE:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fne" : "_Q_fne";
      break;

    case GT:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fgt" : "_Q_fgt";
      break;

    case GE:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fge" : "_Q_fge";
      break;

    case LT:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_flt" : "_Q_flt";
      break;

    case LE:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_fle" : "_Q_fle";
      break;

    case ORDERED:
    case UNORDERED:
    case UNGT:
    case UNLT:
    case UNEQ:
    case UNGE:
    case UNLE:
    case LTGT:
      qpfunc = (TARGET_ARCH64) ? "_Qp_cmp" : "_Q_cmp";
      break;

    default:
      abort();
      break;
    }

  if (TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
	{
	  slot0 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot0, x));
	}
      else
	slot0 = x;

      if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
	{
	  slot1 = assign_stack_temp (TFmode, GET_MODE_SIZE(TFmode), 0);
	  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, slot1, y));
	}
      else
	slot1 = y;

      emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
			 DImode, 2,
			 XEXP (slot0, 0), Pmode,
			 XEXP (slot1, 0), Pmode);

      mode = DImode;
    }
  else
    {
      emit_library_call (gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, qpfunc), LCT_NORMAL,
			 SImode, 2,
			 x, TFmode, y, TFmode);

      mode = SImode;
    }


  /* Immediately move the result of the libcall into a pseudo
     register so reload doesn't clobber the value if it needs
     the return register for a spill reg.  */
  result = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
  emit_move_insn (result, hard_libcall_value (mode));

  switch (comparison)
    {
    default:
      emit_cmp_insn (result, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    case ORDERED:
    case UNORDERED:
      emit_cmp_insn (result, GEN_INT(3), comparison == UNORDERED ? EQ : NE,
		     NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    case UNGT:
    case UNGE:
      emit_cmp_insn (result, const1_rtx,
		     comparison == UNGT ? GT : NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    case UNLE:
      emit_cmp_insn (result, const2_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    case UNLT:
      tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
      if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
      else
	emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
      emit_cmp_insn (tem, const0_rtx, NE, NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    case UNEQ:
    case LTGT:
      tem = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
      if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	emit_insn (gen_addsi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
      else
	emit_insn (gen_adddi3 (tem, result, const1_rtx));
      tem2 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
      if (TARGET_ARCH32)
	emit_insn (gen_andsi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
      else
	emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (tem2, tem, const2_rtx));
      emit_cmp_insn (tem2, const0_rtx, comparison == UNEQ ? EQ : NE,
		     NULL_RTX, mode, 0);
      break;
    }
}

/* Generate an unsigned DImode to FP conversion.  This is the same code
   optabs would emit if we didn't have TFmode patterns.  */

void
sparc_emit_floatunsdi (rtx *operands)
{
  rtx neglab, donelab, i0, i1, f0, in, out;
  enum machine_mode mode;

  out = operands[0];
  in = force_reg (DImode, operands[1]);
  mode = GET_MODE (out);
  neglab = gen_label_rtx ();
  donelab = gen_label_rtx ();
  i0 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
  i1 = gen_reg_rtx (DImode);
  f0 = gen_reg_rtx (mode);

  emit_cmp_and_jump_insns (in, const0_rtx, LT, const0_rtx, DImode, 0, neglab);

  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, in)));
  emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (donelab));
  emit_barrier ();

  emit_label (neglab);

  emit_insn (gen_lshrdi3 (i0, in, const1_rtx));
  emit_insn (gen_anddi3 (i1, in, const1_rtx));
  emit_insn (gen_iordi3 (i0, i0, i1));
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, f0, gen_rtx_FLOAT (mode, i0)));
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, out, gen_rtx_PLUS (mode, f0, f0)));

  emit_label (donelab);
}

/* Return the string to output a conditional branch to LABEL, testing
   register REG.  LABEL is the operand number of the label; REG is the
   operand number of the reg.  OP is the conditional expression.  The mode
   of REG says what kind of comparison we made.

   REVERSED is nonzero if we should reverse the sense of the comparison.

   ANNUL is nonzero if we should generate an annulling branch.

   NOOP is nonzero if we have to follow this branch by a noop.  */

char *
output_v9branch (rtx op, rtx dest, int reg, int label, int reversed,
		 int annul, int noop, rtx insn)
{
  static char string[50];
  enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (op);
  enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (op, 0));
  rtx note;
  int far;
  char *p;

  /* branch on register are limited to +-128KB.  If it is too far away,
     change
     
     brnz,pt %g1, .LC30
     
     to
     
     brz,pn %g1, .+12
     nop
     ba,pt %xcc, .LC30
     
     and
     
     brgez,a,pn %o1, .LC29
     
     to
     
     brlz,pt %o1, .+16
     nop
     ba,pt %xcc, .LC29  */

  far = get_attr_length (insn) >= 3;

  /* If not floating-point or if EQ or NE, we can just reverse the code.  */
  if (reversed ^ far)
    code = reverse_condition (code);

  /* Only 64 bit versions of these instructions exist.  */
  if (mode != DImode)
    abort ();

  /* Start by writing the branch condition.  */

  switch (code)
    {
    case NE:
      strcpy (string, "brnz");
      break;

    case EQ:
      strcpy (string, "brz");
      break;

    case GE:
      strcpy (string, "brgez");
      break;

    case LT:
      strcpy (string, "brlz");
      break;

    case LE:
      strcpy (string, "brlez");
      break;

    case GT:
      strcpy (string, "brgz");
      break;

    default:
      abort ();
    }

  p = strchr (string, '\0');

  /* Now add the annulling, reg, label, and nop.  */
  if (annul && ! far)
    {
      strcpy (p, ",a");
      p += 2;
    }

  if (insn && (note = find_reg_note (insn, REG_BR_PROB, NULL_RTX)))
    {
      strcpy (p,
	      ((INTVAL (XEXP (note, 0)) >= REG_BR_PROB_BASE / 2) ^ far)
	      ? ",pt" : ",pn");
      p += 3;
    }

  *p = p < string + 8 ? '\t' : ' ';
  p++;
  *p++ = '%';
  *p++ = '0' + reg;
  *p++ = ',';
  *p++ = ' ';
  if (far)
    {
      int veryfar = 1, delta;

      if (INSN_ADDRESSES_SET_P ())
	{
	  delta = (INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (dest))
		   - INSN_ADDRESSES (INSN_UID (insn)));
	  /* Leave some instructions for "slop".  */
	  if (delta >= -260000 && delta < 260000)
	    veryfar = 0;
	}

      strcpy (p, ".+12\n\tnop\n\t");
      if (annul || noop)
        p[3] = '6';
      p += 11;
      if (veryfar)
	{
	  strcpy (p, "b\t");
	  p += 2;
	}
      else
	{
	  strcpy (p, "ba,pt\t%%xcc, ");
	  p += 13;
	}
    }
  *p++ = '%';
  *p++ = 'l';
  *p++ = '0' + label;
  *p = '\0';

  if (noop)
    strcpy (p, "\n\tnop");

  return string;
}

/* Return 1, if any of the registers of the instruction are %l[0-7] or %o[0-7].
   Such instructions cannot be used in the delay slot of return insn on v9.
   If TEST is 0, also rename all %i[0-7] registers to their %o[0-7] counterparts.
 */

static int
epilogue_renumber (register rtx *where, int test)
{
  register const char *fmt;
  register int i;
  register enum rtx_code code;

  if (*where == 0)
    return 0;

  code = GET_CODE (*where);

  switch (code)
    {
    case REG:
      if (REGNO (*where) >= 8 && REGNO (*where) < 24)      /* oX or lX */
	return 1;
      if (! test && REGNO (*where) >= 24 && REGNO (*where) < 32)
	*where = gen_rtx (REG, GET_MODE (*where), OUTGOING_REGNO (REGNO(*where)));
    case SCRATCH:
    case CC0:
    case PC:
    case CONST_INT:
    case CONST_DOUBLE:
      return 0;

      /* Do not replace the frame pointer with the stack pointer because
	 it can cause the delayed instruction to load below the stack.
	 This occurs when instructions like:

	 (set (reg/i:SI 24 %i0)
	     (mem/f:SI (plus:SI (reg/f:SI 30 %fp)
                       (const_int -20 [0xffffffec])) 0))

	 are in the return delayed slot.  */
    case PLUS:
      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
	  && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
	  && (GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 1)) != CONST_INT
	      || INTVAL (XEXP (*where, 1)) < SPARC_STACK_BIAS))
	return 1;
      break;

    case MEM:
      if (SPARC_STACK_BIAS
	  && GET_CODE (XEXP (*where, 0)) == REG
	  && REGNO (XEXP (*where, 0)) == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)
	return 1;
      break;

    default:
      break;
    }

  fmt = GET_RTX_FORMAT (code);

  for (i = GET_RTX_LENGTH (code) - 1; i >= 0; i--)
    {
      if (fmt[i] == 'E')
	{
	  register int j;
	  for (j = XVECLEN (*where, i) - 1; j >= 0; j--)
	    if (epilogue_renumber (&(XVECEXP (*where, i, j)), test))
	      return 1;
	}
      else if (fmt[i] == 'e'
	       && epilogue_renumber (&(XEXP (*where, i)), test))
	return 1;
    }
  return 0;
}
\f
/* Leaf functions and non-leaf functions have different needs.  */

static const int
reg_leaf_alloc_order[] = REG_LEAF_ALLOC_ORDER;

static const int
reg_nonleaf_alloc_order[] = REG_ALLOC_ORDER;

static const int *const reg_alloc_orders[] = {
  reg_leaf_alloc_order,
  reg_nonleaf_alloc_order};

void
order_regs_for_local_alloc (void)
{
  static int last_order_nonleaf = 1;

  if (regs_ever_live[15] != last_order_nonleaf)
    {
      last_order_nonleaf = !last_order_nonleaf;
      memcpy ((char *) reg_alloc_order,
	      (const char *) reg_alloc_orders[last_order_nonleaf],
	      FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof (int));
    }
}
\f
/* Return 1 if REG and MEM are legitimate enough to allow the various
   mem<-->reg splits to be run.  */

int
sparc_splitdi_legitimate (rtx reg, rtx mem)
{
  /* Punt if we are here by mistake.  */
  if (! reload_completed)
    abort ();

  /* We must have an offsettable memory reference.  */
  if (! offsettable_memref_p (mem))
    return 0;

  /* If we have legitimate args for ldd/std, we do not want
     the split to happen.  */
  if ((REGNO (reg) % 2) == 0
      && mem_min_alignment (mem, 8))
    return 0;

  /* Success.  */
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if x and y are some kind of REG and they refer to
   different hard registers.  This test is guaranteed to be
   run after reload.  */

int
sparc_absnegfloat_split_legitimate (rtx x, rtx y)
{
  if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
    return 0;
  if (GET_CODE (y) != REG)
    return 0;
  if (REGNO (x) == REGNO (y))
    return 0;
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if REGNO (reg1) is even and REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1.
   This makes them candidates for using ldd and std insns. 

   Note reg1 and reg2 *must* be hard registers.  */

int
registers_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx reg1, rtx reg2)
{
  /* We might have been passed a SUBREG.  */
  if (GET_CODE (reg1) != REG || GET_CODE (reg2) != REG) 
    return 0;

  if (REGNO (reg1) % 2 != 0)
    return 0;

  /* Integer ldd is deprecated in SPARC V9 */ 
  if (TARGET_V9 && REGNO (reg1) < 32)                  
    return 0;                             

  return (REGNO (reg1) == REGNO (reg2) - 1);
}

/* Return 1 if the addresses in mem1 and mem2 are suitable for use in
   an ldd or std insn.
   
   This can only happen when addr1 and addr2, the addresses in mem1
   and mem2, are consecutive memory locations (addr1 + 4 == addr2).
   addr1 must also be aligned on a 64-bit boundary.

   Also iff dependent_reg_rtx is not null it should not be used to
   compute the address for mem1, i.e. we cannot optimize a sequence
   like:
   	ld [%o0], %o0
	ld [%o0 + 4], %o1
   to
   	ldd [%o0], %o0
   nor:
	ld [%g3 + 4], %g3
	ld [%g3], %g2
   to
        ldd [%g3], %g2

   But, note that the transformation from:
	ld [%g2 + 4], %g3
        ld [%g2], %g2
   to
	ldd [%g2], %g2
   is perfectly fine.  Thus, the peephole2 patterns always pass us
   the destination register of the first load, never the second one.

   For stores we don't have a similar problem, so dependent_reg_rtx is
   NULL_RTX.  */

int
mems_ok_for_ldd_peep (rtx mem1, rtx mem2, rtx dependent_reg_rtx)
{
  rtx addr1, addr2;
  unsigned int reg1;
  int offset1;

  /* The mems cannot be volatile.  */
  if (MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem1) || MEM_VOLATILE_P (mem2))
    return 0;

  /* MEM1 should be aligned on a 64-bit boundary.  */
  if (MEM_ALIGN (mem1) < 64)
    return 0;
  
  addr1 = XEXP (mem1, 0);
  addr2 = XEXP (mem2, 0);
  
  /* Extract a register number and offset (if used) from the first addr.  */
  if (GET_CODE (addr1) == PLUS)
    {
      /* If not a REG, return zero.  */
      if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 0)) != REG)
	return 0;
      else
	{
          reg1 = REGNO (XEXP (addr1, 0));
	  /* The offset must be constant!  */
	  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr1, 1)) != CONST_INT)
            return 0;
          offset1 = INTVAL (XEXP (addr1, 1));
	}
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (addr1) != REG)
    return 0;
  else
    {
      reg1 = REGNO (addr1);
      /* This was a simple (mem (reg)) expression.  Offset is 0.  */
      offset1 = 0;
    }

  /* Make sure the second address is a (mem (plus (reg) (const_int).  */
  if (GET_CODE (addr2) != PLUS)
    return 0;

  if (GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 0)) != REG
      || GET_CODE (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != CONST_INT)
    return 0;

  if (reg1 != REGNO (XEXP (addr2, 0)))
    return 0;

  if (dependent_reg_rtx != NULL_RTX && reg1 == REGNO (dependent_reg_rtx))
    return 0;
  
  /* The first offset must be evenly divisible by 8 to ensure the 
     address is 64 bit aligned.  */
  if (offset1 % 8 != 0)
    return 0;

  /* The offset for the second addr must be 4 more than the first addr.  */
  if (INTVAL (XEXP (addr2, 1)) != offset1 + 4)
    return 0;

  /* All the tests passed.  addr1 and addr2 are valid for ldd and std
     instructions.  */
  return 1;
}

/* Return 1 if reg is a pseudo, or is the first register in 
   a hard register pair.  This makes it a candidate for use in
   ldd and std insns.  */

int
register_ok_for_ldd (rtx reg)
{
  /* We might have been passed a SUBREG.  */
  if (GET_CODE (reg) != REG) 
    return 0;

  if (REGNO (reg) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
    return (REGNO (reg) % 2 == 0);
  else 
    return 1;
}
\f
/* Print operand X (an rtx) in assembler syntax to file FILE.
   CODE is a letter or dot (`z' in `%z0') or 0 if no letter was specified.
   For `%' followed by punctuation, CODE is the punctuation and X is null.  */

void
print_operand (FILE *file, rtx x, int code)
{
  switch (code)
    {
    case '#':
      /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot.  */
      if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0)
	fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
      return;
    case '*':
      /* Output an annul flag if there's nothing for the delay slot and we
	 are optimizing.  This is always used with '(' below.  */
      /* Sun OS 4.1.1 dbx can't handle an annulled unconditional branch;
	 this is a dbx bug.  So, we only do this when optimizing.  */
      /* On UltraSPARC, a branch in a delay slot causes a pipeline flush.
	 Always emit a nop in case the next instruction is a branch.  */
      if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
	  && (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
	fputs (",a", file);
      return;
    case '(':
      /* Output a 'nop' if there's nothing for the delay slot and we are
	 not optimizing.  This is always used with '*' above.  */
      if (dbr_sequence_length () == 0
	  && ! (optimize && (int)sparc_cpu < PROCESSOR_V9))
	fputs ("\n\t nop", file);
      return;
    case '_':
      /* Output the Embedded Medium/Anywhere code model base register.  */
      fputs (EMBMEDANY_BASE_REG, file);
      return;
    case '@':
      /* Print out what we are using as the frame pointer.  This might
	 be %fp, or might be %sp+offset.  */
      /* ??? What if offset is too big? Perhaps the caller knows it isn't? */
      fprintf (file, "%s+%d", frame_base_name, frame_base_offset);
      return;
    case '&':
      /* Print some local dynamic TLS name.  */
      assemble_name (file, get_some_local_dynamic_name ());
      return;
    case 'Y':
      /* Adjust the operand to take into account a RESTORE operation.  */
      if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT)
	break;
      else if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
	output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
      else if (REGNO (x) < 8)
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
      else if (REGNO (x) >= 24 && REGNO (x) < 32)
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)-16], file);
      else
	output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%Y operand");
      return;
    case 'L':
      /* Print out the low order register name of a register pair.  */
      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
      else
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
      return;
    case 'H':
      /* Print out the high order register name of a register pair.  */
      if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
      else
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
      return;
    case 'R':
      /* Print out the second register name of a register pair or quad.
	 I.e., R (%o0) => %o1.  */
      fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+1], file);
      return;
    case 'S':
      /* Print out the third register name of a register quad.
	 I.e., S (%o0) => %o2.  */
      fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+2], file);
      return;
    case 'T':
      /* Print out the fourth register name of a register quad.
	 I.e., T (%o0) => %o3.  */
      fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)+3], file);
      return;
    case 'x':
      /* Print a condition code register.  */
      if (REGNO (x) == SPARC_ICC_REG)
	{
	  /* We don't handle CC[X]_NOOVmode because they're not supposed
	     to occur here.  */
	  if (GET_MODE (x) == CCmode)
	    fputs ("%icc", file);
	  else if (GET_MODE (x) == CCXmode)
	    fputs ("%xcc", file);
	  else
	    abort ();
	}
      else
	/* %fccN register */
	fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
      return;
    case 'm':
      /* Print the operand's address only.  */
      output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
      return;
    case 'r':
      /* In this case we need a register.  Use %g0 if the
	 operand is const0_rtx.  */
      if (x == const0_rtx
	  || (GET_MODE (x) != VOIDmode && x == CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (x))))
	{
	  fputs ("%g0", file);
	  return;
	}
      else
	break;

    case 'A':
      switch (GET_CODE (x))
	{
	case IOR: fputs ("or", file); break;
	case AND: fputs ("and", file); break;
	case XOR: fputs ("xor", file); break;
	default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%A operand");
	}
      return;

    case 'B':
      switch (GET_CODE (x))
	{
	case IOR: fputs ("orn", file); break;
	case AND: fputs ("andn", file); break;
	case XOR: fputs ("xnor", file); break;
	default: output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%B operand");
	}
      return;

      /* These are used by the conditional move instructions.  */
    case 'c' :
    case 'C':
      {
	enum rtx_code rc = GET_CODE (x);
	
	if (code == 'c')
	  {
	    enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (XEXP (x, 0));
	    if (mode == CCFPmode || mode == CCFPEmode)
	      rc = reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (GET_CODE (x));
	    else
	      rc = reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x));
	  }
	switch (rc)
	  {
	  case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
	  case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
	  case GE: fputs ("ge", file); break;
	  case GT: fputs ("g", file); break;
	  case LE: fputs ("le", file); break;
	  case LT: fputs ("l", file); break;
	  case GEU: fputs ("geu", file); break;
	  case GTU: fputs ("gu", file); break;
	  case LEU: fputs ("leu", file); break;
	  case LTU: fputs ("lu", file); break;
	  case LTGT: fputs ("lg", file); break;
	  case UNORDERED: fputs ("u", file); break;
	  case ORDERED: fputs ("o", file); break;
	  case UNLT: fputs ("ul", file); break;
	  case UNLE: fputs ("ule", file); break;
	  case UNGT: fputs ("ug", file); break;
	  case UNGE: fputs ("uge", file); break;
	  case UNEQ: fputs ("ue", file); break;
	  default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'c'
					   ? "invalid %%c operand"
					   : "invalid %%C operand");
	  }
	return;
      }

      /* These are used by the movr instruction pattern.  */
    case 'd':
    case 'D':
      {
	enum rtx_code rc = (code == 'd'
			    ? reverse_condition (GET_CODE (x))
			    : GET_CODE (x));
	switch (rc)
	  {
	  case NE: fputs ("ne", file); break;
	  case EQ: fputs ("e", file); break;
	  case GE: fputs ("gez", file); break;
	  case LT: fputs ("lz", file); break;
	  case LE: fputs ("lez", file); break;
	  case GT: fputs ("gz", file); break;
	  default: output_operand_lossage (code == 'd'
					   ? "invalid %%d operand"
					   : "invalid %%D operand");
	  }
	return;
      }

    case 'b':
      {
	/* Print a sign-extended character.  */
	int i = trunc_int_for_mode (INTVAL (x), QImode);
	fprintf (file, "%d", i);
	return;
      }

    case 'f':
      /* Operand must be a MEM; write its address.  */
      if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
	output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%f operand");
      output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
      return;

    case 's':
      {
	/* Print a sign-extended 32-bit value.  */
	HOST_WIDE_INT i;
	if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_INT)
	  i = INTVAL (x);
	else if (GET_CODE(x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
	  i = CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x);
	else
	  {
	    output_operand_lossage ("invalid %%s operand");
	    return;
	  }
	i = trunc_int_for_mode (i, SImode);
	fprintf (file, HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC, i);
	return;
      }

    case 0:
      /* Do nothing special.  */
      break;

    default:
      /* Undocumented flag.  */
      output_operand_lossage ("invalid operand output code");
    }

  if (GET_CODE (x) == REG)
    fputs (reg_names[REGNO (x)], file);
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
    {
      fputc ('[', file);
	/* Poor Sun assembler doesn't understand absolute addressing.  */
      if (CONSTANT_P (XEXP (x, 0)))
	fputs ("%g0+", file);
      output_address (XEXP (x, 0));
      fputc (']', file);
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == HIGH)
    {
      fputs ("%hi(", file);
      output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 0));
      fputc (')', file);
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == LO_SUM)
    {
      print_operand (file, XEXP (x, 0), 0);
      if (TARGET_CM_MEDMID)
	fputs ("+%l44(", file);
      else
	fputs ("+%lo(", file);
      output_addr_const (file, XEXP (x, 1));
      fputc (')', file);
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
	   && (GET_MODE (x) == VOIDmode
	       || GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT))
    {
      if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == 0)
	fprintf (file, "%u", (unsigned int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
      else if (CONST_DOUBLE_HIGH (x) == -1
	       && CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x) < 0)
	fprintf (file, "%d", (int) CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (x));
      else
	output_operand_lossage ("long long constant not a valid immediate operand");
    }
  else if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE)
    output_operand_lossage ("floating point constant not a valid immediate operand");
  else { output_addr_const (file, x); }
}
\f
/* Target hook for assembling integer objects.  The sparc version has
   special handling for aligned DI-mode objects.  */

static bool
sparc_assemble_integer (rtx x, unsigned int size, int aligned_p)
{
  /* ??? We only output .xword's for symbols and only then in environments
     where the assembler can handle them.  */
  if (aligned_p && size == 8
      && (GET_CODE (x) != CONST_INT && GET_CODE (x) != CONST_DOUBLE))
    {
      if (TARGET_V9)
	{
	  assemble_integer_with_op ("\t.xword\t", x);
	  return true;
	}
      else
	{
	  assemble_aligned_integer (4, const0_rtx);
	  assemble_aligned_integer (4, x);
	  return true;
	}
    }
  return default_assemble_integer (x, size, aligned_p);
}
\f
/* Return the value of a code used in the .proc pseudo-op that says
   what kind of result this function returns.  For non-C types, we pick
   the closest C type.  */

#ifndef SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
#define SHORT_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_UNIT * 2)
#endif

#ifndef INT_TYPE_SIZE
#define INT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
#endif

#ifndef LONG_TYPE_SIZE
#define LONG_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
#endif

#ifndef LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
#define LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
#endif

#ifndef FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
#define FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE BITS_PER_WORD
#endif

#ifndef DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
#define DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
#endif

#ifndef LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
#define LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE (BITS_PER_WORD * 2)
#endif

unsigned long
sparc_type_code (register tree type)
{
  register unsigned long qualifiers = 0;
  register unsigned shift;

  /* Only the first 30 bits of the qualifier are valid.  We must refrain from
     setting more, since some assemblers will give an error for this.  Also,
     we must be careful to avoid shifts of 32 bits or more to avoid getting
     unpredictable results.  */

  for (shift = 6; shift < 30; shift += 2, type = TREE_TYPE (type))
    {
      switch (TREE_CODE (type))
	{
	case ERROR_MARK:
	  return qualifiers;
  
	case ARRAY_TYPE:
	  qualifiers |= (3 << shift);
	  break;

	case FUNCTION_TYPE:
	case METHOD_TYPE:
	  qualifiers |= (2 << shift);
	  break;

	case POINTER_TYPE:
	case REFERENCE_TYPE:
	case OFFSET_TYPE:
	  qualifiers |= (1 << shift);
	  break;

	case RECORD_TYPE:
	  return (qualifiers | 8);

	case UNION_TYPE:
	case QUAL_UNION_TYPE:
	  return (qualifiers | 9);

	case ENUMERAL_TYPE:
	  return (qualifiers | 10);

	case VOID_TYPE:
	  return (qualifiers | 16);

	case INTEGER_TYPE:
	  /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
	     type.  */
	  if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
	    break;

	  /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
	     without messing up if the language is not C.  We do this by
	     testing TYPE_PRECISION and TREE_UNSIGNED.  The old code used to
	     look at both the names and the above fields, but that's redundant.
	     Any type whose size is between two C types will be considered
	     to be the wider of the two types.  Also, we do not have a
	     special code to use for "long long", so anything wider than
	     long is treated the same.  Note that we can't distinguish
	     between "int" and "long" in this code if they are the same
	     size, but that's fine, since neither can the assembler.  */

	  if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= CHAR_TYPE_SIZE)
	    return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 12 : 2));
  
	  else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= SHORT_TYPE_SIZE)
	    return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 13 : 3));
  
	  else if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= INT_TYPE_SIZE)
	    return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 14 : 4));
  
	  else
	    return (qualifiers | (TREE_UNSIGNED (type) ? 15 : 5));
  
	case REAL_TYPE:
	  /* If this is a range type, consider it to be the underlying
	     type.  */
	  if (TREE_TYPE (type) != 0)
	    break;

	  /* Carefully distinguish all the standard types of C,
	     without messing up if the language is not C.  */

	  if (TYPE_PRECISION (type) == FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE)
	    return (qualifiers | 6);

	  else 
	    return (qualifiers | 7);
  
	case COMPLEX_TYPE:	/* GNU Fortran COMPLEX type.  */
	  /* ??? We need to distinguish between double and float complex types,
	     but I don't know how yet because I can't reach this code from
	     existing front-ends.  */
	  return (qualifiers | 7);	/* Who knows? */

	case CHAR_TYPE:		/* GNU Pascal CHAR type.  Not used in C.  */
	case BOOLEAN_TYPE:	/* GNU Fortran BOOLEAN type.  */
	case FILE_TYPE:		/* GNU Pascal FILE type.  */
	case SET_TYPE:		/* GNU Pascal SET type.  */
	case LANG_TYPE:		/* ? */
	  return qualifiers;
  
	default:
	  abort ();		/* Not a type! */
        }
    }

  return qualifiers;
}
\f
/* Nested function support.  */

/* Emit RTL insns to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
   FNADDR is an RTX for the address of the function's pure code.
   CXT is an RTX for the static chain value for the function.

   This takes 16 insns: 2 shifts & 2 ands (to split up addresses), 4 sethi
   (to load in opcodes), 4 iors (to merge address and opcodes), and 4 writes
   (to store insns).  This is a bit excessive.  Perhaps a different
   mechanism would be better here.

   Emit enough FLUSH insns to synchronize the data and instruction caches.  */

void
sparc_initialize_trampoline (rtx tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt)
{
  /* SPARC 32 bit trampoline:

 	sethi	%hi(fn), %g1
 	sethi	%hi(static), %g2
 	jmp	%g1+%lo(fn)
 	or	%g2, %lo(static), %g2

    SETHI i,r  = 00rr rrr1 00ii iiii iiii iiii iiii iiii
    JMPL r+i,d = 10dd ddd1 1100 0rrr rr1i iiii iiii iiii
   */
#ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
  emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
                     LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
#endif

  emit_move_insn
    (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 0)),
     expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
		   expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, fnaddr,
				 size_int (10), 0, 1),
		   GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x03000000, SImode)),
		   NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));

  emit_move_insn
    (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
     expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
		   expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, SImode, cxt,
				 size_int (10), 0, 1),
		   GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x05000000, SImode)),
		   NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));

  emit_move_insn
    (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
     expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
		   expand_and (SImode, fnaddr, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
		   GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c06000, SImode)),
		   NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));

  emit_move_insn
    (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
     expand_binop (SImode, ior_optab,
		   expand_and (SImode, cxt, GEN_INT (0x3ff), NULL_RTX),
		   GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x8410a000, SImode)),
		   NULL_RTX, 1, OPTAB_DIRECT));

  /* On UltraSPARC a flush flushes an entire cache line.  The trampoline is
     aligned on a 16 byte boundary so one flush clears it all.  */
  emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp))));
  if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
      && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
    emit_insn (gen_flush (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode,
						     plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
}

/* The 64 bit version is simpler because it makes more sense to load the
   values as "immediate" data out of the trampoline.  It's also easier since
   we can read the PC without clobbering a register.  */

void
sparc64_initialize_trampoline (rtx tramp, rtx fnaddr, rtx cxt)
{
#ifdef TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
  emit_library_call (gen_rtx (SYMBOL_REF, Pmode, "__enable_execute_stack"),
                     LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, tramp, Pmode);
#endif

  /*
	rd	%pc, %g1
	ldx	[%g1+24], %g5
	jmp	%g5
	ldx	[%g1+16], %g5
	+16 bytes data
   */

  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, tramp),
		  GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x83414000, SImode)));
  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 4)),
		  GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586018, SImode)));
  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)),
		  GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0x81c14000, SImode)));
  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (SImode, plus_constant (tramp, 12)),
		  GEN_INT (trunc_int_for_mode (0xca586010, SImode)));
  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 16)), cxt);
  emit_move_insn (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 24)), fnaddr);
  emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, tramp))));

  if (sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
      && sparc_cpu != PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
    emit_insn (gen_flushdi (validize_mem (gen_rtx_MEM (DImode, plus_constant (tramp, 8)))));
}
\f
/* Subroutines to support a flat (single) register window calling
   convention.  */

/* Single-register window sparc stack frames look like:

             Before call		        After call
        +-----------------------+	+-----------------------+
   high |		        |	|			|
   mem  |  caller's temps.    	|       |  caller's temps.    	|
	|       		|       |       	        |
        +-----------------------+	+-----------------------+
 	|       		|	|		        |
        |  arguments on stack.  |	|  arguments on stack.  |
	|       		|      	|			|
        +-----------------------+FP+92->+-----------------------+
 	|  6 words to save     	|	|  6 words to save	|
	|  arguments passed	|	|  arguments passed	|
	|  in registers, even	|	|  in registers, even	|
       	|  if not passed.       |      	|  if not passed.	|
 SP+68->+-----------------------+FP+68->+-----------------------+
        | 1 word struct addr	|      	| 1 word struct addr	|
        +-----------------------+FP+64->+-----------------------+
        |			|	|			|
        | 16 word reg save area	|	| 16 word reg save area |
       	|                       |      	|			|
    SP->+-----------------------+   FP->+-----------------------+
				        | 4 word area for	|
				       	| fp/alu reg moves	|
				 FP-16->+-----------------------+
				        |			|
				        |  local variables	|
				        |			|
				        +-----------------------+
				        |		        |
                                        |  fp register save     |
				        |			|
				        +-----------------------+
				        |		        |
                                        |  gp register save     |
                                        |       		|
				        +-----------------------+
				        |			|
                                        |  alloca allocations   |
        			        |			|
				        +-----------------------+
				        |			|
                                        |  arguments on stack   |
        			       	|		        |
				 SP+92->+-----------------------+
                                        |  6 words to save      |
				        |  arguments passed     |
                                        |  in registers, even   |
   low                                 	|  if not passed.       |
   memory        		 SP+68->+-----------------------+
				       	| 1 word struct addr	|
				 SP+64->+-----------------------+
				        |			|
				        I 16 word reg save area |
				       	|			|
				    SP->+-----------------------+  */

/* Structure to be filled in by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size with register
   save masks, and offsets for the current function.  */

struct sparc_frame_info
{
  unsigned long total_size;	/* # bytes that the entire frame takes up.  */
  unsigned long var_size;	/* # bytes that variables take up.  */
  unsigned long args_size;	/* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up.  */
  unsigned long extra_size;	/* # bytes of extra gunk.  */
  unsigned int  gp_reg_size;	/* # bytes needed to store gp regs.  */
  unsigned int  fp_reg_size;	/* # bytes needed to store fp regs.  */
  unsigned long gmask;		/* Mask of saved gp registers.  */
  unsigned long fmask;		/* Mask of saved fp registers.  */
  unsigned long reg_offset;	/* Offset from new sp to store regs.  */
  int		initialized;	/* Nonzero if frame size already calculated.  */
};

/* Current frame information calculated by sparc_flat_compute_frame_size.  */
struct sparc_frame_info current_frame_info;

/* Zero structure to initialize current_frame_info.  */
struct sparc_frame_info zero_frame_info;

/* Tell prologue and epilogue if register REGNO should be saved / restored.  */

#define RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM 15
#define HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK (1 << (HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM))
#define RETURN_ADDR_MASK (1 << (RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM))

#define MUST_SAVE_REGISTER(regno) \
 ((regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno])			\
  || (regno == HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM && frame_pointer_needed)	\
  || (regno == RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM && regs_ever_live[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]))

/* Return the bytes needed to compute the frame pointer from the current
   stack pointer.  */

unsigned long
sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (int size)
              			/* # of var. bytes allocated.  */
{
  int regno;
  unsigned long total_size;	/* # bytes that the entire frame takes up.  */
  unsigned long var_size;	/* # bytes that variables take up.  */
  unsigned long args_size;	/* # bytes that outgoing arguments take up.  */
  unsigned long extra_size;	/* # extra bytes.  */
  unsigned int  gp_reg_size;	/* # bytes needed to store gp regs.  */
  unsigned int  fp_reg_size;	/* # bytes needed to store fp regs.  */
  unsigned long gmask;		/* Mask of saved gp registers.  */
  unsigned long fmask;		/* Mask of saved fp registers.  */
  unsigned long reg_offset;	/* Offset to register save area.  */
  int           need_aligned_p;	/* 1 if need the save area 8 byte aligned.  */

  /* This is the size of the 16 word reg save area, 1 word struct addr
     area, and 4 word fp/alu register copy area.  */
  extra_size = -STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET + FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0);
  var_size = size;
  gp_reg_size = 0;
  fp_reg_size = 0;
  gmask = 0;
  fmask = 0;
  reg_offset = 0;
  need_aligned_p = 0;

  args_size = 0;
  if (!leaf_function_p ())
    {
      /* Also include the size needed for the 6 parameter registers.  */
      args_size = current_function_outgoing_args_size + 24;
    }
  total_size = var_size + args_size;

  /* Calculate space needed for gp registers.  */
  for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
    {
      if (MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno))
	{
	  /* If we need to save two regs in a row, ensure there's room to bump
	     up the address to align it to a doubleword boundary.  */
	  if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && MUST_SAVE_REGISTER (regno+1))
	    {
	      if (gp_reg_size % 8 != 0)
		gp_reg_size += 4;
	      gp_reg_size += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
	      gmask |= 3 << regno;
	      regno++;
	      need_aligned_p = 1;
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      gp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
	      gmask |= 1 << regno;
	    }
	}
    }

  /* Calculate space needed for fp registers.  */
  for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
    {
      if (regs_ever_live[regno] && !call_used_regs[regno])
	{
	  fp_reg_size += UNITS_PER_WORD;
	  fmask |= 1 << (regno - 32);
	}
    }

  if (gmask || fmask)
    {
      int n;
      reg_offset = FIRST_PARM_OFFSET(0) + args_size;
      /* Ensure save area is 8 byte aligned if we need it.  */
      n = reg_offset % 8;
      if (need_aligned_p && n != 0)
	{
	  total_size += 8 - n;
	  reg_offset += 8 - n;
	}
      total_size += gp_reg_size + fp_reg_size;
    }

  /* If we must allocate a stack frame at all, we must also allocate 
     room for register window spillage, so as to be binary compatible
     with libraries and operating systems that do not use -mflat.  */
  if (total_size > 0)
    total_size += extra_size;
  else
    extra_size = 0;

  total_size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (total_size);

  /* Save other computed information.  */
  current_frame_info.total_size  = total_size;
  current_frame_info.var_size    = var_size;
  current_frame_info.args_size   = args_size;
  current_frame_info.extra_size  = extra_size;
  current_frame_info.gp_reg_size = gp_reg_size;
  current_frame_info.fp_reg_size = fp_reg_size;
  current_frame_info.gmask	 = gmask;
  current_frame_info.fmask	 = fmask;
  current_frame_info.reg_offset	 = reg_offset;
  current_frame_info.initialized = reload_completed;

  /* Ok, we're done.  */
  return total_size;
}
\f
/* Save/restore registers in GMASK and FMASK at register BASE_REG plus offset
   OFFSET.

   BASE_REG must be 8 byte aligned.  This allows us to test OFFSET for
   appropriate alignment and use DOUBLEWORD_OP when we can.  We assume
   [BASE_REG+OFFSET] will always be a valid address.

   WORD_OP is either "st" for save, "ld" for restore.
   DOUBLEWORD_OP is either "std" for save, "ldd" for restore.  */

void
sparc_flat_save_restore (FILE *file, const char *base_reg,
			 unsigned int offset, long unsigned int gmask,
			 long unsigned int fmask, const char *word_op,
			 const char *doubleword_op,
			 long unsigned int base_offset)
{
  int regno;

  if (gmask == 0 && fmask == 0)
    return;

  /* Save registers starting from high to low.  We've already saved the
     previous frame pointer and previous return address for the debugger's
     sake.  The debugger allows us to not need a nop in the epilog if at least
     one register is reloaded in addition to return address.  */

  if (gmask)
    {
      for (regno = 1; regno <= 31; regno++)
	{
	  if ((gmask & (1L << regno)) != 0)
	    {
	      if ((regno & 0x1) == 0 && ((gmask & (1L << (regno+1))) != 0))
		{
		  /* We can save two registers in a row.  If we're not at a
		     double word boundary, move to one.
		     sparc_flat_compute_frame_size ensures there's room to do
		     this.  */
		  if (offset % 8 != 0)
		    offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;

		  if (word_op[0] == 's')
		    {
		      fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			       doubleword_op, reg_names[regno],
			       base_reg, offset);
		      if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
			{
			  char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
			  dwarf2out_reg_save (l, regno, offset + base_offset);
			  dwarf2out_reg_save
			    (l, regno+1, offset+base_offset + UNITS_PER_WORD);
			}
		    }
		  else
		    fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
			     doubleword_op, base_reg, offset,
			     reg_names[regno]);

		  offset += 2 * UNITS_PER_WORD;
		  regno++;
		}
	      else
		{
		  if (word_op[0] == 's')
		    {
		      fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			       word_op, reg_names[regno],
			       base_reg, offset);
		      if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
			dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
		    }
		  else
		    fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
			     word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);

		  offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
		}
	    }
	}
    }

  if (fmask)
    {
      for (regno = 32; regno <= 63; regno++)
	{
	  if ((fmask & (1L << (regno - 32))) != 0)
	    {
	      if (word_op[0] == 's')
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\t%s\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   word_op, reg_names[regno],
			   base_reg, offset);
		  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		    dwarf2out_reg_save ("", regno, offset + base_offset);
		}
	      else
		fprintf (file, "\t%s\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
			 word_op, base_reg, offset, reg_names[regno]);

	      offset += UNITS_PER_WORD;
	    }
	}
    }
}
\f
/* Set up the stack and frame (if desired) for the function.  */

static void
sparc_flat_function_prologue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
{
  const char *sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
  unsigned long gmask = current_frame_info.gmask;

  sparc_output_scratch_registers (file);

  /* This is only for the human reader.  */
  fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 0\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
  fprintf (file, "\t%s# vars= %ld, regs= %d/%d, args= %d, extra= %ld\n",
	   ASM_COMMENT_START,
	   current_frame_info.var_size,
	   current_frame_info.gp_reg_size / 4,
	   current_frame_info.fp_reg_size / 4,
	   current_function_outgoing_args_size,
	   current_frame_info.extra_size);

  size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
  size = (! current_frame_info.initialized
	  ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
	  : current_frame_info.total_size);

  /* These cases shouldn't happen.  Catch them now.  */
  if (size == 0 && (gmask || current_frame_info.fmask))
    abort ();

  /* Allocate our stack frame by decrementing %sp.
     At present, the only algorithm gdb can use to determine if this is a
     flat frame is if we always set %i7 if we set %sp.  This can be optimized
     in the future by putting in some sort of debugging information that says
     this is a `flat' function.  However, there is still the case of debugging
     code without such debugging information (including cases where most fns
     have such info, but there is one that doesn't).  So, always do this now
     so we don't get a lot of code out there that gdb can't handle.
     If the frame pointer isn't needn't then that's ok - gdb won't be able to
     distinguish us from a non-flat function but there won't (and shouldn't)
     be any differences anyway.  The return pc is saved (if necessary) right
     after %i7 so gdb won't have to look too far to find it.  */
  if (size > 0)
    {
      unsigned int reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
      const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
      static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";

      /* Things get a little tricky if local variables take up more than ~4096
	 bytes and outgoing arguments take up more than ~4096 bytes.  When that
	 happens, the register save area can't be accessed from either end of
	 the frame.  Handle this by decrementing %sp to the start of the gp
	 register save area, save the regs, update %i7, and then set %sp to its
	 final value.  Given that we only have one scratch register to play
	 with it is the cheapest solution, and it helps gdb out as it won't
	 slow down recognition of flat functions.
	 Don't change the order of insns emitted here without checking with
	 the gdb folk first.  */

      /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp?  */
      if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
	{
	  if (size <= 4096)
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
		       sp_str, (int) -size, sp_str);
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
		  fprintf (file, "\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
			   sp_str, (int) -size, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
		  reg_offset += 4;
		}
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
		       ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
		       size, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
			   fp_str, sp_str, reg_offset);
		  fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
			   sp_str, t1_str, fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
		  reg_offset += 4;
		}
	    }
	  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
	    {
	      char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
				      reg_offset - 4 - size);
		  dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
		}
	      else
		dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
	    }
	  if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
		       reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, reg_offset);
	      if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		dwarf2out_return_save ("", reg_offset - size);
	      reg_offset += 4;
	    }
	  sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
				   gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
				   current_frame_info.fmask,
				   "st", "std", -size);
	}
      else
	{
	  /* Subtract %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
	     64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned.  */
	  /* Amount to decrement %sp by, the first time.  */
	  unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1 = ((size - reg_offset + 64) + 15) & -16;
	  /* Offset to register save area from %sp.  */
	  unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT offset = size1 - (size - reg_offset);
	  
	  if (size1 <= 4096)
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n",
		       sp_str, (int) -size1, sp_str);
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
			   fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, (int) -size1,
			   fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
		  offset += 4;
		}
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
		       ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
		       size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\t%s# set up frame pointer\n",
			   fp_str, sp_str, (int) offset, sp_str, t1_str,
			   fp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
		  offset += 4;
		}
	    }
	  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
	    {
	      char *l = dwarf2out_cfi_label ();
	      if (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
		{
		  dwarf2out_reg_save (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM,
				      offset - 4 - size1);
		  dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, 0);
		}
	      else
		dwarf2out_def_cfa (l, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size1);
	    }
	  if (gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
	    {
	      fprintf (file, "\tst\t%s, [%s+%d]\n",
		       reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM], sp_str, (int) offset);
	      if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
		/* offset - size1 == reg_offset - size
		   if reg_offset were updated above like offset.  */
		dwarf2out_return_save ("", offset - size1);
	      offset += 4;
	    }
	  sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, offset,
				   gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
				   current_frame_info.fmask,
				   "st", "std", -size1);
	  fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
		   ", %s\n\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\n",
		   size - size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
	  if (dwarf2out_do_frame ())
	    if (! (gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK))
	      dwarf2out_def_cfa ("", STACK_POINTER_REGNUM, size);
	}
    }

  fprintf (file, "\t%s#PROLOGUE# 1\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);
}
\f
/* Do any necessary cleanup after a function to restore stack, frame,
   and regs.  */

static void
sparc_flat_function_epilogue (FILE *file, HOST_WIDE_INT size)
{
  rtx epilogue_delay = current_function_epilogue_delay_list;
  int noepilogue = FALSE;

  /* This is only for the human reader.  */
  fprintf (file, "\t%s#EPILOGUE#\n", ASM_COMMENT_START);

  /* The epilogue does not depend on any registers, but the stack
     registers, so we assume that if we have 1 pending nop, it can be
     ignored, and 2 it must be filled (2 nops occur for integer
     multiply and divide).  */

  size = SPARC_STACK_ALIGN (size);
  size = (!current_frame_info.initialized
	   ? sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (size)
	   : current_frame_info.total_size);

  if (size == 0 && epilogue_delay == 0)
    {
      rtx insn = get_last_insn ();

      /* If the last insn was a BARRIER, we don't have to write any code
	 because a jump (aka return) was put there.  */
      if (GET_CODE (insn) == NOTE)
	insn = prev_nonnote_insn (insn);
      if (insn && GET_CODE (insn) == BARRIER)
	noepilogue = TRUE;
    }

  if (!noepilogue)
    {
      unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT reg_offset = current_frame_info.reg_offset;
      unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT size1;
      const char *const sp_str = reg_names[STACK_POINTER_REGNUM];
      const char *const fp_str = reg_names[HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM];
      static const char *const t1_str = "%g1";

      /* In the reload sequence, we don't need to fill the load delay
	 slots for most of the loads, also see if we can fill the final
	 delay slot if not otherwise filled by the reload sequence.  */

      if (size > 4095)
	fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC ", %s\n",
		 size, t1_str);

      if (frame_pointer_needed)
	{
	  if (size > 4095)
	    fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %s, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
		     fp_str, t1_str, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
	  else
	    fprintf (file,"\tsub\t%s, %d, %s\t\t%s# sp not trusted here\n",
		     fp_str, (int) size, sp_str, ASM_COMMENT_START);
	}

      /* Is the entire register save area offsettable from %sp?  */
      if (reg_offset < 4096 - 64 * (unsigned) UNITS_PER_WORD)
	{
	  size1 = 0;
	}
      else
	{
	  /* Restore %sp in two steps, but make sure there is always a
	     64 byte register save area, and %sp is properly aligned.  */
	  /* Amount to increment %sp by, the first time.  */
	  size1 = ((reg_offset - 64 - 16) + 15) & -16;
	  /* Offset to register save area from %sp.  */
	  reg_offset = size1 - reg_offset;

	  fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC
		   ", %s\n\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n",
		   size1, t1_str, sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);
	}

      /* We must restore the frame pointer and return address reg first
	 because they are treated specially by the prologue output code.  */
      if (current_frame_info.gmask & HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK)
	{
	  fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
		   sp_str, (int) reg_offset, fp_str);
	  reg_offset += 4;
	}
      if (current_frame_info.gmask & RETURN_ADDR_MASK)
	{
	  fprintf (file, "\tld\t[%s+%d], %s\n",
		   sp_str, (int) reg_offset, reg_names[RETURN_ADDR_REGNUM]);
	  reg_offset += 4;
	}

      /* Restore any remaining saved registers.  */
      sparc_flat_save_restore (file, sp_str, reg_offset,
			       current_frame_info.gmask & ~(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_MASK | RETURN_ADDR_MASK),
			       current_frame_info.fmask,
			       "ld", "ldd", 0);

      /* If we had to increment %sp in two steps, record it so the second
	 restoration in the epilogue finishes up.  */
      if (size1 > 0)
	{
	  size -= size1;
	  if (size > 4095)
	    fprintf (file, "\tset\t" HOST_WIDE_INT_PRINT_DEC ", %s\n",
		     size, t1_str);
	}

      if (current_function_returns_struct)
	fprintf (file, "\tjmp\t%%o7+12\n");
      else
	fprintf (file, "\tretl\n");

      /* If the only register saved is the return address, we need a
	 nop, unless we have an instruction to put into it.  Otherwise
	 we don't since reloading multiple registers doesn't reference
	 the register being loaded.  */

      if (epilogue_delay)
	{
	  if (size)
	    abort ();
	  final_scan_insn (XEXP (epilogue_delay, 0), file, 1, -2, 1);
	}

      else if (size > 4095)
	fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %s, %s\n", sp_str, t1_str, sp_str);

      else if (size > 0)
	fprintf (file, "\tadd\t%s, %d, %s\n", sp_str, (int) size, sp_str);

      else
	fprintf (file, "\tnop\n");
    }

  /* Reset state info for each function.  */
  current_frame_info = zero_frame_info;

  sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors ();
}
\f
/* Define the number of delay slots needed for the function epilogue.

   On the sparc, we need a slot if either no stack has been allocated,
   or the only register saved is the return register.  */

int
sparc_flat_epilogue_delay_slots (void)
{
  if (!current_frame_info.initialized)
    (void) sparc_flat_compute_frame_size (get_frame_size ());

  if (current_frame_info.total_size == 0)
    return 1;

  return 0;
}

/* Return true if TRIAL is a valid insn for the epilogue delay slot.
   Any single length instruction which doesn't reference the stack or frame
   pointer is OK.  */

int
sparc_flat_eligible_for_epilogue_delay (rtx trial, int slot ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  rtx pat = PATTERN (trial);

  if (get_attr_length (trial) != 1)
    return 0;

  if (! reg_mentioned_p (stack_pointer_rtx, pat)
      && ! reg_mentioned_p (frame_pointer_rtx, pat))
    return 1;

  return 0;
}
\f
/* Adjust the cost of a scheduling dependency.  Return the new cost of
   a dependency LINK or INSN on DEP_INSN.  COST is the current cost.  */

static int
supersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost)
{
  enum attr_type insn_type;

  if (! recog_memoized (insn))
    return 0;

  insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);

  if (REG_NOTE_KIND (link) == 0)
    {
      /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
	 cycles later.  */

      /* if a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address;
	 add an extra "cycle".  Note that the cost could be two cycles
	 if the reg was written late in an instruction group; we ca not tell
	 here.  */
      if (insn_type == TYPE_LOAD || insn_type == TYPE_FPLOAD)
	return cost + 3;

      /* Get the delay only if the address of the store is the dependence.  */
      if (insn_type == TYPE_STORE || insn_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
	{
	  rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
	  rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);

	  if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
	    return cost;  /* This should not happen!  */

	  /* The dependency between the two instructions was on the data that
	     is being stored.  Assume that this implies that the address of the
	     store is not dependent.  */
	  if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
	    return cost;

	  return cost + 3;  /* An approximation.  */
	}

      /* A shift instruction cannot receive its data from an instruction
	 in the same cycle; add a one cycle penalty.  */
      if (insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
	return cost + 3;   /* Split before cascade into shift.  */
    }
  else
    {
      /* Anti- or output- dependency; DEP_INSN reads/writes a register that
	 INSN writes some cycles later.  */

      /* These are only significant for the fpu unit; writing a fp reg before
         the fpu has finished with it stalls the processor.  */

      /* Reusing an integer register causes no problems.  */
      if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
	return 0;
    }
	
  return cost;
}

static int
hypersparc_adjust_cost (rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep_insn, int cost)
{
  enum attr_type insn_type, dep_type;
  rtx pat = PATTERN(insn);
  rtx dep_pat = PATTERN (dep_insn);

  if (recog_memoized (insn) < 0 || recog_memoized (dep_insn) < 0)
    return cost;

  insn_type = get_attr_type (insn);
  dep_type = get_attr_type (dep_insn);

  switch (REG_NOTE_KIND (link))
    {
    case 0:
      /* Data dependency; DEP_INSN writes a register that INSN reads some
	 cycles later.  */

      switch (insn_type)
	{
	case TYPE_STORE:
	case TYPE_FPSTORE:
	  /* Get the delay iff the address of the store is the dependence.  */
	  if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET)
	    return cost;

	  if (rtx_equal_p (SET_DEST (dep_pat), SET_SRC (pat)))
	    return cost;
	  return cost + 3;

	case TYPE_LOAD:
	case TYPE_SLOAD:
	case TYPE_FPLOAD:
	  /* If a load, then the dependence must be on the memory address.  If
	     the addresses aren't equal, then it might be a false dependency */
	  if (dep_type == TYPE_STORE || dep_type == TYPE_FPSTORE)
	    {
	      if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET || GET_CODE (dep_pat) != SET
		  || GET_CODE (SET_DEST (dep_pat)) != MEM        
		  || GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)) != MEM
		  || ! rtx_equal_p (XEXP (SET_DEST (dep_pat), 0),
				    XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0)))
		return cost + 2;

	      return cost + 8;        
	    }
	  break;

	case TYPE_BRANCH:
	  /* Compare to branch latency is 0.  There is no benefit from
	     separating compare and branch.  */
	  if (dep_type == TYPE_COMPARE)
	    return 0;
	  /* Floating point compare to branch latency is less than
	     compare to conditional move.  */
	  if (dep_type == TYPE_FPCMP)
	    return cost - 1;
	  break;
	default:
	  break;
	}
	break;

    case REG_DEP_ANTI:
      /* Anti-dependencies only penalize the fpu unit.  */
      if (insn_type == TYPE_IALU || insn_type == TYPE_SHIFT)
        return 0;
      break;

    default:
      break;
    }    

  return cost;
}

static int
sparc_adjust_cost(rtx insn, rtx link, rtx dep, int cost)
{
  switch (sparc_cpu)
    {
    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
      cost = supersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
      break;
    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
      cost = hypersparc_adjust_cost (insn, link, dep, cost);
      break;
    default:
      break;
    }
  return cost;
}

static void
sparc_sched_init (FILE *dump ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
		  int sched_verbose ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
		  int max_ready ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
}
  
static int
sparc_use_dfa_pipeline_interface (void)
{
  if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
      ((1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_CYPRESS) |
       (1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
       (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X) | (1 << PROCESSOR_TSC701) |
       (1 << PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)))
    return 1;
  return 0;
}

static int
sparc_use_sched_lookahead (void)
{
  if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC
      || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
    return 4;
  if ((1 << sparc_cpu) &
      ((1 << PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC) | (1 << PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC) |
       (1 << PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)))
    return 3;
  return 0;
}

static int
sparc_issue_rate (void)
{
  switch (sparc_cpu)
    {
    default:
      return 1;
    case PROCESSOR_V9:
      /* Assume V9 processors are capable of at least dual-issue.  */
      return 2;
    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
      return 3;
    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
      return 2;
    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
      return 4;
    }
}

static int
set_extends (rtx insn)
{
  register rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);

  switch (GET_CODE (SET_SRC (pat)))
    {
      /* Load and some shift instructions zero extend.  */
    case MEM:
    case ZERO_EXTEND:
      /* sethi clears the high bits */
    case HIGH:
      /* LO_SUM is used with sethi.  sethi cleared the high
	 bits and the values used with lo_sum are positive */
    case LO_SUM:
      /* Store flag stores 0 or 1 */
    case LT: case LTU:
    case GT: case GTU:
    case LE: case LEU:
    case GE: case GEU:
    case EQ:
    case NE:
      return 1;
    case AND:
      {
	rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
	rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
	if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
	  return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
	if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
	  return 0;
	if (sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) == 1)
	  return 1;
	return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
      }
    case IOR:
    case XOR:
      {
	rtx op0 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 0);
	rtx op1 = XEXP (SET_SRC (pat), 1);
	if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG || sparc_check_64 (op0, insn) <= 0)
	  return 0;
	if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
	  return INTVAL (op1) >= 0;
	return (GET_CODE (op1) == REG && sparc_check_64 (op1, insn) == 1);
      }
    case LSHIFTRT:
      return GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode;
      /* Positive integers leave the high bits zero.  */
    case CONST_DOUBLE:
      return ! (CONST_DOUBLE_LOW (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
    case CONST_INT:
      return ! (INTVAL (SET_SRC (pat)) & 0x80000000);
    case ASHIFTRT:
    case SIGN_EXTEND:
      return - (GET_MODE (SET_SRC (pat)) == SImode);
    case REG:
      return sparc_check_64 (SET_SRC (pat), insn);
    default:
      return 0;
    }
}

/* We _ought_ to have only one kind per function, but...  */
static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_diff_list;
static GTY(()) rtx sparc_addr_list;

void
sparc_defer_case_vector (rtx lab, rtx vec, int diff)
{
  vec = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, lab, vec);
  if (diff)
    sparc_addr_diff_list
      = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_diff_list);
  else
    sparc_addr_list = gen_rtx_EXPR_LIST (VOIDmode, vec, sparc_addr_list);
}

static void 
sparc_output_addr_vec (rtx vec)
{
  rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
  int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 0);

#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START  
  ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
#endif

#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
  ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
			 NEXT_INSN (lab));
#else
  (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
#endif

  for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
    {
      ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
	(asm_out_file, CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 0, idx), 0)));
    }
    
#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
  ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
#endif
}

static void 
sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (rtx vec)
{
  rtx lab = XEXP (vec, 0), body = XEXP (vec, 1);
  rtx base = XEXP (XEXP (body, 0), 0);
  int idx, vlen = XVECLEN (body, 1);

#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START  
  ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_START (asm_out_file);
#endif

#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
  ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab),
			 NEXT_INSN (lab));
#else
  (*targetm.asm_out.internal_label) (asm_out_file, "L", CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (lab));
#endif

  for (idx = 0; idx < vlen; idx++)
    {
      ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
        (asm_out_file,
         body,
         CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (XEXP (XVECEXP (body, 1, idx), 0)),
         CODE_LABEL_NUMBER (base));
    }
    
#ifdef ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END
  ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_END (asm_out_file);
#endif
}

static void
sparc_output_deferred_case_vectors (void)
{
  rtx t;
  int align;

  if (sparc_addr_list == NULL_RTX
      && sparc_addr_diff_list == NULL_RTX)
    return;

  /* Align to cache line in the function's code section.  */
  function_section (current_function_decl);

  align = floor_log2 (FUNCTION_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
  if (align > 0)
    ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (asm_out_file, align);
  
  for (t = sparc_addr_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
    sparc_output_addr_vec (XEXP (t, 0));
  for (t = sparc_addr_diff_list; t ; t = XEXP (t, 1))
    sparc_output_addr_diff_vec (XEXP (t, 0));

  sparc_addr_list = sparc_addr_diff_list = NULL_RTX;
}

/* Return 0 if the high 32 bits of X (the low word of X, if DImode) are
   unknown.  Return 1 if the high bits are zero, -1 if the register is
   sign extended.  */
int
sparc_check_64 (rtx x, rtx insn)
{
  /* If a register is set only once it is safe to ignore insns this
     code does not know how to handle.  The loop will either recognize
     the single set and return the correct value or fail to recognize
     it and return 0.  */
  int set_once = 0;
  rtx y = x;

  if (GET_CODE (x) != REG)
    abort ();

  if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode)
    y = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (x) + WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN);

  if (flag_expensive_optimizations
      && REG_N_SETS (REGNO (y)) == 1)
    set_once = 1;

  if (insn == 0)
    {
      if (set_once)
	insn = get_last_insn_anywhere ();
      else
	return 0;
    }

  while ((insn = PREV_INSN (insn)))
    {
      switch (GET_CODE (insn))
	{
	case JUMP_INSN:
	case NOTE:
	  break;
	case CODE_LABEL:
	case CALL_INSN:
	default:
	  if (! set_once)
	    return 0;
	  break;
	case INSN:
	  {
	    rtx pat = PATTERN (insn);
	    if (GET_CODE (pat) != SET)
	      return 0;
	    if (rtx_equal_p (x, SET_DEST (pat)))
	      return set_extends (insn);
	    if (y && rtx_equal_p (y, SET_DEST (pat)))
	      return set_extends (insn);
	    if (reg_overlap_mentioned_p (SET_DEST (pat), y))
	      return 0;
	  }
	}
    }
  return 0;
}

/* Returns assembly code to perform a DImode shift using
   a 64-bit global or out register on SPARC-V8+.  */
char *
sparc_v8plus_shift (rtx *operands, rtx insn, const char *opcode)
{
  static char asm_code[60];

  /* The scratch register is only required when the destination
     register is not a 64-bit global or out register.  */
  if (which_alternative != 2)
    operands[3] = operands[0];

  /* We can only shift by constants <= 63. */
  if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) == CONST_INT)
    operands[2] = GEN_INT (INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0x3f);

  if (GET_CODE (operands[1]) == CONST_INT)
    {
      output_asm_insn ("mov\t%1, %3", operands);
    }
  else
    {
      output_asm_insn ("sllx\t%H1, 32, %3", operands);
      if (sparc_check_64 (operands[1], insn) <= 0)
	output_asm_insn ("srl\t%L1, 0, %L1", operands);
      output_asm_insn ("or\t%L1, %3, %3", operands);
    }

  strcpy(asm_code, opcode);

  if (which_alternative != 2)
    return strcat (asm_code, "\t%0, %2, %L0\n\tsrlx\t%L0, 32, %H0");
  else
    return strcat (asm_code, "\t%3, %2, %3\n\tsrlx\t%3, 32, %H0\n\tmov\t%3, %L0");
}
\f
/* Output rtl to increment the profiler label LABELNO
   for profiling a function entry.  */

void
sparc_profile_hook (int labelno)
{
  char buf[32];
  rtx lab, fun;

  ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (buf, "LP", labelno);
  lab = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, ggc_strdup (buf));
  fun = gen_rtx_SYMBOL_REF (Pmode, MCOUNT_FUNCTION);

  emit_library_call (fun, LCT_NORMAL, VOIDmode, 1, lab, Pmode);
}
\f
#ifdef OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF
static void
sparc_elf_asm_named_section (const char *name, unsigned int flags)
{
  if (flags & SECTION_MERGE)
    {
      /* entsize cannot be expressed in this section attributes
	 encoding style.  */
      default_elf_asm_named_section (name, flags);
      return;
    }

  fprintf (asm_out_file, "\t.section\t\"%s\"", name);

  if (!(flags & SECTION_DEBUG))
    fputs (",#alloc", asm_out_file);
  if (flags & SECTION_WRITE)
    fputs (",#write", asm_out_file);
  if (flags & SECTION_CODE)
    fputs (",#execinstr", asm_out_file);

  /* ??? Handle SECTION_BSS.  */

  fputc ('\n', asm_out_file);
}
#endif /* OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF */

/* We do not allow sibling calls if -mflat, nor
   we do not allow indirect calls to be optimized into sibling calls.
   
   Also, on sparc 32-bit we cannot emit a sibling call when the
   current function returns a structure.  This is because the "unimp
   after call" convention would cause the callee to return to the
   wrong place.  The generic code already disallows cases where the
   function being called returns a structure.

   It may seem strange how this last case could occur.  Usually there
   is code after the call which jumps to epilogue code which dumps the
   return value into the struct return area.  That ought to invalidate
   the sibling call right?  Well, in the c++ case we can end up passing
   the pointer to the struct return area to a constructor (which returns
   void) and then nothing else happens.  Such a sibling call would look
   valid without the added check here.  */
static bool
sparc_function_ok_for_sibcall (tree decl, tree exp ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  return (decl
	  && ! TARGET_FLAT
	  && (TARGET_ARCH64 || ! current_function_returns_struct));
}
\f
/* libfunc renaming.  */
#include "config/gofast.h"

static void
sparc_init_libfuncs (void)
{
  if (TARGET_ARCH32)
    {
      /* Use the subroutines that Sun's library provides for integer
	 multiply and divide.  The `*' prevents an underscore from
	 being prepended by the compiler. .umul is a little faster
	 than .mul. */
      set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, "*.umul");
      set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, "*.div");
      set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, "*.udiv");
      set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, "*.rem");
      set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, "*.urem");

      /* TFmode arithmetic.  These names are part of the SPARC 32bit ABI.  */
      set_optab_libfunc (add_optab, TFmode, "_Q_add");
      set_optab_libfunc (sub_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sub");
      set_optab_libfunc (neg_optab, TFmode, "_Q_neg");
      set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, TFmode, "_Q_mul");
      set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, TFmode, "_Q_div");

      /* We can define the TFmode sqrt optab only if TARGET_FPU.  This
	 is because with soft-float, the SFmode and DFmode sqrt
	 instructions will be absent, and the compiler will notice and
	 try to use the TFmode sqrt instruction for calls to the
	 builtin function sqrt, but this fails.  */
      if (TARGET_FPU)
	set_optab_libfunc (sqrt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_sqrt");

      set_optab_libfunc (eq_optab, TFmode, "_Q_feq");
      set_optab_libfunc (ne_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fne");
      set_optab_libfunc (gt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fgt");
      set_optab_libfunc (ge_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fge");
      set_optab_libfunc (lt_optab, TFmode, "_Q_flt");
      set_optab_libfunc (le_optab, TFmode, "_Q_fle");

      set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab,   TFmode, SFmode, "_Q_stoq");
      set_conv_libfunc (sext_optab,   TFmode, DFmode, "_Q_dtoq");
      set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab,  SFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtos");
      set_conv_libfunc (trunc_optab,  DFmode, TFmode, "_Q_qtod");

      set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab,   SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtoi");
      set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab,   SImode, TFmode, "_Q_qtou");
      set_conv_libfunc (sfloat_optab, TFmode, SImode, "_Q_itoq");

      if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS)
	{
	  set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoll");
	  set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoull");
	  set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoll");
	  set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoull");
	}
    }
  if (TARGET_ARCH64)
    {
      /* In the SPARC 64bit ABI, SImode multiply and divide functions
	 do not exist in the library.  Make sure the compiler does not
	 emit calls to them by accident.  (It should always use the
         hardware instructions.)  */
      set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, SImode, 0);
      set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, SImode, 0);
      set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, SImode, 0);
      set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, SImode, 0);
      set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, SImode, 0);

      if (SUN_INTEGER_MULTIPLY_64)
	{
	  set_optab_libfunc (smul_optab, DImode, "__mul64");
	  set_optab_libfunc (sdiv_optab, DImode, "__div64");
	  set_optab_libfunc (udiv_optab, DImode, "__udiv64");
	  set_optab_libfunc (smod_optab, DImode, "__rem64");
	  set_optab_libfunc (umod_optab, DImode, "__urem64");
	}

      if (SUN_CONVERSION_LIBFUNCS)
	{
	  set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftol");
	  set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, SFmode, "__ftoul");
	  set_conv_libfunc (sfix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtol");
	  set_conv_libfunc (ufix_optab, DImode, DFmode, "__dtoul");
	}
    }

  gofast_maybe_init_libfuncs ();
}
\f
/* ??? Similar to the standard section selection, but force reloc-y-ness
   if SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES.  Unclear why this helps (as opposed to
   pretending PIC always on), but that's what the old code did.  */

static void
sparc_aout_select_section (tree t, int reloc, unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align)
{
  default_select_section (t, reloc | SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES, align);
}

/* Use text section for a constant unless we need more alignment than
   that offers.  */

static void
sparc_aout_select_rtx_section (enum machine_mode mode, rtx x,
			       unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT align)
{
  if (align <= MAX_TEXT_ALIGN
      && ! (flag_pic && (symbolic_operand (x, mode)
			 || SUNOS4_SHARED_LIBRARIES)))
    readonly_data_section ();
  else
    data_section ();
}

int
sparc_extra_constraint_check (rtx op, int c, int strict)
{
  int reload_ok_mem;

  if (TARGET_ARCH64
      && (c == 'T' || c == 'U'))
    return 0;

  switch (c)
    {
    case 'Q':
      return fp_sethi_p (op);

    case 'R':
      return fp_mov_p (op);

    case 'S':
      return fp_high_losum_p (op);

    case 'U':
      if (! strict
	  || (GET_CODE (op) == REG
	      && (REGNO (op) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
		  || reg_renumber[REGNO (op)] >= 0)))
	return register_ok_for_ldd (op);

      return 0;

    case 'W':
    case 'T':
      break;

    default:
      return 0;
    }

  /* Our memory extra constraints have to emulate the
     behavior of 'm' and 'o' in order for reload to work
     correctly.  */
  if (GET_CODE (op) == MEM)
    {
      reload_ok_mem = 0;
      if ((TARGET_ARCH64 || mem_min_alignment (op, 8))
	  && (! strict
	      || strict_memory_address_p (Pmode, XEXP (op, 0))))
	reload_ok_mem = 1;
    }
  else
    {
      reload_ok_mem = (reload_in_progress
		       && GET_CODE (op) == REG
		       && REGNO (op) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
		       && reg_renumber [REGNO (op)] < 0);
    }

  return reload_ok_mem;
}

/* ??? This duplicates information provided to the compiler by the
   ??? scheduler description.  Some day, teach genautomata to output
   ??? the latencies and then CSE will just use that.  */

static bool
sparc_rtx_costs (rtx x, int code, int outer_code, int *total)
{
  switch (code)
    {
    case PLUS: case MINUS: case ABS: case NEG:
    case FLOAT: case UNSIGNED_FLOAT:
    case FIX: case UNSIGNED_FIX:
    case FLOAT_EXTEND: case FLOAT_TRUNCATE:
      if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
	{
	  switch (sparc_cpu)
	    {
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	    default:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	      return true;
	    }
	}

      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
      return true;

    case SQRT:
      switch (sparc_cpu)
	{
	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	  if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	  if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (29);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (63);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
	  return true;

	default:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (30);
	  return true;
	}

    case COMPARE:
      if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
	{
	  switch (sparc_cpu)
	    {
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	    default:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	      return true;
	    }
	}

      /* ??? Maybe mark integer compares as zero cost on
	 ??? all UltraSPARC processors because the result
	 ??? can be bypassed to a branch in the same group.  */

      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
      return true;

    case MULT:
      if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
	{
	  switch (sparc_cpu)
	    {
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (4);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	      return true;

	    default:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (5);
	      return true;
	    }
	}

      /* The latency is actually variable for Ultra-I/II
	 And if one of the inputs have a known constant
	 value, we could calculate this precisely.

	 However, for that to be useful we would need to
	 add some machine description changes which would
	 make sure small constants ended up in rs1 of the
	 multiply instruction.  This is because the multiply
	 latency is determined by the number of clear (or
	 set if the value is negative) bits starting from
	 the most significant bit of the first input.

	 The algorithm for computing num_cycles of a multiply
	 on Ultra-I/II is:

	 	if (rs1 < 0)
			highest_bit = highest_clear_bit(rs1);
		else
			highest_bit = highest_set_bit(rs1);
		if (num_bits < 3)
			highest_bit = 3;
		num_cycles = 4 + ((highest_bit - 3) / 2);

	 If we did that we would have to also consider register
	 allocation issues that would result from forcing such
	 a value into a register.

	 There are other similar tricks we could play if we
	 knew, for example, that one input was an array index.

	 Since we do not play any such tricks currently the
	 safest thing to do is report the worst case latency.  */
      if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
	{
	  *total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
		    ? COSTS_N_INSNS (34) : COSTS_N_INSNS (19));
	  return true;
	}

      /* Multiply latency on Ultra-III, fortunately, is constant.  */
      if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
	{
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
	  return true;
	}

      if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC
	  || sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X)
	{
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
	  return true;
	}

      *total = (TARGET_HARD_MUL ? COSTS_N_INSNS (5) : COSTS_N_INSNS (25));
      return true;

    case DIV:
    case UDIV:
    case MOD:
    case UMOD:
      if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
	{
	  switch (sparc_cpu)
	    {
	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	      if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (13);
	      else
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (23);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	      if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (17);
	      else
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (20);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	      if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (6);
	      else
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (9);
	      return true;

	    case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	    case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	      if (GET_MODE (x) == SFmode)
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (8);
	      else
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (12);
	      return true;

	    default:
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (7);
	      return true;
	    }
	}

      if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC)
	*total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
		  ? COSTS_N_INSNS (68) : COSTS_N_INSNS (37));
      else if (sparc_cpu == PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3)
	*total = (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
		  ? COSTS_N_INSNS (71) : COSTS_N_INSNS (40));
      else
	*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (25);
      return true;

    case IF_THEN_ELSE:
      /* Conditional moves. */
      switch (sparc_cpu)
	{
	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	  if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x)))
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	  return true;

	default:
	  *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	  return true;
	}

    case MEM:
      /* If outer-code is SIGN/ZERO extension we have to subtract
	 out COSTS_N_INSNS (1) from whatever we return in determining
	 the cost.  */
      switch (sparc_cpu)
	{
	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC:
	  if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_ULTRASPARC3:
	  if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND)
	    {
	      if (GET_MODE (x) == QImode
		  || GET_MODE (x) == HImode
		  || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	      else
		*total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	    }
	  else
	    {
	      /* This handles sign extension (3 cycles)
		 and everything else (2 cycles).  */
	      *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	    }
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_SUPERSPARC:
	  if (FLOAT_MODE_P (GET_MODE (x))
	      || outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
	      || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	  return true;

	case PROCESSOR_TSC701:
	  if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
	      || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (3);
	  return true;
	  
	case PROCESSOR_CYPRESS:
	  if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
	      || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (2);
	  return true;
	  
	case PROCESSOR_HYPERSPARC:
	case PROCESSOR_SPARCLITE86X:
	default:
	  if (outer_code == ZERO_EXTEND
	      || outer_code == SIGN_EXTEND)
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (0);
	  else
	    *total = COSTS_N_INSNS (1);
	  return true;
	}

    case CONST_INT:
      if (INTVAL (x) < 0x1000 && INTVAL (x) >= -0x1000)
	{
	  *total = 0;
	  return true;
	}
      /* FALLTHRU */

    case HIGH:
      *total = 2;
      return true;

    case CONST:
    case LABEL_REF:
    case SYMBOL_REF:
      *total = 4;
      return true;

    case CONST_DOUBLE:
      if (GET_MODE (x) == DImode
	  && ((XINT (x, 3) == 0
	       && (unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT) XINT (x, 2) < 0x1000)
	      || (XINT (x, 3) == -1
		  && XINT (x, 2) < 0
		  && XINT (x, 2) >= -0x1000)))
	*total = 0;
      else
	*total = 8;
      return true;

    default:
      return false;
    }
}

/* Output code to add DELTA to the first argument, and then jump to FUNCTION.
   Used for C++ multiple inheritance.  */

static void
sparc_output_mi_thunk (FILE *file, tree thunk_fndecl ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
		       HOST_WIDE_INT delta,
		       HOST_WIDE_INT vcall_offset ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
		       tree function)
{
  rtx this, insn, funexp, delta_rtx, tmp;

  reload_completed = 1;
  epilogue_completed = 1;
  no_new_pseudos = 1;
  current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs = 1;

  emit_note (NOTE_INSN_PROLOGUE_END);

  /* Find the "this" pointer.  Normally in %o0, but in ARCH64 if the function
     returns a structure, the structure return pointer is there instead.  */
  if (TARGET_ARCH64 && aggregate_value_p (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (function)), function))
    this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST + 1);
  else
    this = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, SPARC_INCOMING_INT_ARG_FIRST);

  /* Add DELTA.  When possible use a plain add, otherwise load it into
     a register first.  */
  delta_rtx = GEN_INT (delta);
  if (!SPARC_SIMM13_P (delta))
    {
      rtx scratch = gen_rtx_REG (Pmode, 1);
      if (TARGET_ARCH64)
	sparc_emit_set_const64 (scratch, delta_rtx);
      else
	sparc_emit_set_const32 (scratch, delta_rtx);
      delta_rtx = scratch;
    }

  tmp = gen_rtx_PLUS (Pmode, this, delta_rtx);
  emit_insn (gen_rtx_SET (VOIDmode, this, tmp));

  /* Generate a tail call to the target function.  */
  if (! TREE_USED (function))
    {
      assemble_external (function);
      TREE_USED (function) = 1;
    }
  funexp = XEXP (DECL_RTL (function), 0);
  funexp = gen_rtx_MEM (FUNCTION_MODE, funexp);
  insn = emit_call_insn (gen_sibcall (funexp));
  SIBLING_CALL_P (insn) = 1;
  emit_barrier ();

  /* Run just enough of rest_of_compilation to get the insns emitted.
     There's not really enough bulk here to make other passes such as
     instruction scheduling worth while.  Note that use_thunk calls
     assemble_start_function and assemble_end_function.  */
  insn = get_insns ();
  insn_locators_initialize ();
  shorten_branches (insn);
  final_start_function (insn, file, 1);
  final (insn, file, 1, 0);
  final_end_function ();

  reload_completed = 0;
  epilogue_completed = 0;
  no_new_pseudos = 0;
}

/* How to allocate a 'struct machine_function'.  */

static struct machine_function *
sparc_init_machine_status (void)
{
  return ggc_alloc_cleared (sizeof (struct machine_function));
}

/* Locate some local-dynamic symbol still in use by this function
   so that we can print its name in local-dynamic base patterns.  */

static const char *
get_some_local_dynamic_name (void)
{
  rtx insn;

  if (cfun->machine->some_ld_name)
    return cfun->machine->some_ld_name;

  for (insn = get_insns (); insn ; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
    if (INSN_P (insn)
	&& for_each_rtx (&PATTERN (insn), get_some_local_dynamic_name_1, 0))
      return cfun->machine->some_ld_name;

  abort ();
}

static int
get_some_local_dynamic_name_1 (rtx *px, void *data ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
{
  rtx x = *px;

  if (x
      && GET_CODE (x) == SYMBOL_REF
      && SYMBOL_REF_TLS_MODEL (x) == TLS_MODEL_LOCAL_DYNAMIC)
    {
      cfun->machine->some_ld_name = XSTR (x, 0);
      return 1;
    }

  return 0;
}

/* This is called from dwarf2out.c via ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL.
   We need to emit DTP-relative relocations.  */

void
sparc_output_dwarf_dtprel (FILE *file, int size, rtx x)
{
  switch (size)
    {
    case 4:
      fputs ("\t.word\t%r_tls_dtpoff32(", file);
      break;
    case 8:
      fputs ("\t.xword\t%r_tls_dtpoff64(", file);
      break;
    default:
      abort ();
    }
  output_addr_const (file, x);
  fputs (")", file);
}

#include "gt-sparc.h"